You are on page 1of 274

1

Chapter 1: Introduction to ProNest 8.0 .................................................................................................... 1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 1 ProNest Features and Options ..................................................................................................................... 1
ProNest Standard Features ....................................................................................................................................1 ProNest Optional Features......................................................................................................................................2

Installing ProNest .......................................................................................................................................... 3
Installation Procedure .............................................................................................................................................3 Starting ProNest......................................................................................................................................................4

Chapter 2: Quick Start Procedures .......................................................................................................... 5 Install, Start and Authorize ProNest 8........................................................................................................... 5 Settings ......................................................................................................................................................... 6 Chapter 3: Preferences............................................................................................................................ 14 General........................................................................................................................................................ 14 Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................................. 15 Regional ...................................................................................................................................................... 16 Settings ....................................................................................................................................................... 17 Bevel ........................................................................................................................................................... 18 Chapter 4: ProNest Basics ...................................................................................................................... 19 Starting a New Job...................................................................................................................................... 19 Add Parts..................................................................................................................................................... 19
Explorer View........................................................................................................................................................20 Adding to Your Parts List ......................................................................................................................................20 Preview .................................................................................................................................................................21

Add VSP (Variable Shape Part) Part to Part List........................................................................................ 22
Add VSP Part to Current Nest...............................................................................................................................22

Add Pipe Part to Part List............................................................................................................................ 26
Add Pipe Part to Current Nest...............................................................................................................................27

Add Tee....................................................................................................................................................... 29 Saving/Loading Pipe Part............................................................................................................................ 29 Add Plates ................................................................................................................................................... 30
User Defined .........................................................................................................................................................30 Inventory ...............................................................................................................................................................30

Interactive Nesting ...................................................................................................................................... 30
Starting a New Nest ..............................................................................................................................................30 Adding Parts to the Nest .......................................................................................................................................31 Matching Material..................................................................................................................................................31 Zooming In and Out ..............................................................................................................................................33

Working With Selected Parts ...................................................................................................................... 34 Multiple Torches.......................................................................................................................................... 36 Move Lead In/Out Locations ....................................................................................................................... 37 Cut Sequence ............................................................................................................................................. 37 Cut Simulation............................................................................................................................................. 39 Cropping the Plate ...................................................................................................................................... 40 Measure Mode ............................................................................................................................................ 40 Advance to a New Plate.............................................................................................................................. 41 CNC Output................................................................................................................................................. 41

Saving A Job/Opening A Job ...................................................................................................................... 42 Reports........................................................................................................................................................ 43 Automatic Nesting (Optional Feature)......................................................................................................... 44
Rectangular vs True Shape Automatic Nesting ....................................................................................................44 Multiple Torches....................................................................................................................................................45 Using Both Automatic and Interactive Nesting ......................................................................................................45

Material Database ....................................................................................................................................... 45 Customer Database .................................................................................................................................... 46 Advanced Edit ............................................................................................................................................. 46 Additional Utilities of Advanced Edit ........................................................................................................... 48 Saving Changes.......................................................................................................................................... 50 Properties .................................................................................................................................................... 50 Chapter 5: ProNest Options ..................................................................................................................... 53 Plate Inventory Database............................................................................................................................ 53
To open the Plate Inventory Database..................................................................................................................53

Part Inventory Database ............................................................................................................................. 55 Custom Remnants ...................................................................................................................................... 57 Assembly Database .................................................................................................................................... 58 Chain and Bridge Cutting ............................................................................................................................ 59
Chain Cutting Settings ..........................................................................................................................................60 Bridge Cutting Settings .........................................................................................................................................60 Using Chain Cutting ..............................................................................................................................................61 Using Bridge Cutting .............................................................................................................................................62

Common Line Cutting ................................................................................................................................. 63
Common Line Cut Settings ...................................................................................................................................64 Using Common Line Cutting .................................................................................................................................65 Quad CLC (Common Line Cut).............................................................................................................................65

Common Line Cut Array.............................................................................................................................. 67
Creating a CLC Array............................................................................................................................................67

Multi Part Common Line Cut ....................................................................................................................... 69
Working CLC Clusters ..........................................................................................................................................71 Multi-Part CLC Parts .............................................................................................................................................72 Safety Cuts ...........................................................................................................................................................73 Torch path editing .................................................................................................................................................76 Plate Edge Common Line Cut...............................................................................................................................78

Collision Avoidance..................................................................................................................................... 79 Skeleton Cut Up .......................................................................................................................................... 79 Pattern Array ............................................................................................................................................... 80 Part Cut Up ................................................................................................................................................. 81 Chapter 6: Menu and Toolbar Reference............................................................................................... 83 Menu Reference.......................................................................................................................................... 83
File Menu ..............................................................................................................................................................83 Edit Menu..............................................................................................................................................................83 View Menu ............................................................................................................................................................84 Job Menu ..............................................................................................................................................................84 Nest Menu.............................................................................................................................................................85 Part Menu .............................................................................................................................................................86

Help Menu.............................................................................................................................................................87

Toolbars Reference..................................................................................................................................... 87 Customizing ProNest Desktop .................................................................................................................... 91 Chapter 7: ProNest Settings References............................................................................................... 94 What are ProNest Settings?........................................................................................................................ 94 How are settings saved?............................................................................................................................. 94 What is a ProNest machine?....................................................................................................................... 95 Using the settings dialog ............................................................................................................................. 96 Creating a new machine ............................................................................................................................. 98 Editing a machine's settings........................................................................................................................ 98 Settings tables (Spreadsheets)................................................................................................................... 99 Saving your machine settings ..................................................................................................................... 99 Machine..................................................................................................................................................... 100 Add or Remove Processes ....................................................................................................................... 101 Select a Post Processor (CFF) ................................................................................................................. 102 Reuse Existing Settings ............................................................................................................................ 103 Importing Parts.......................................................................................................................................... 104 Importing Parts (Advanced) ...................................................................................................................... 111 Bevel ......................................................................................................................................................... 113 Bevel - Pass Profiles ................................................................................................................................. 115 Standard Plate Sizes................................................................................................................................. 117 Torches ..................................................................................................................................................... 119 Work Zones ............................................................................................................................................... 121 Nesting ...................................................................................................................................................... 125 AutoNest.................................................................................................................................................... 127 Pattern Array Strategies............................................................................................................................ 130 AutoNest Strategies .................................................................................................................................. 132 AutoNest Strategies - Rectangular Optimization ...................................................................................... 133 AutoNest Strategies - True Shape ............................................................................................................ 135 Optimization .............................................................................................................................................. 138 Cut Sequence ........................................................................................................................................... 141 Cut Sequence - Interior Profile.................................................................................................................. 144 Cut Sequence Rules ................................................................................................................................. 147 Editing a cut sequence rule....................................................................................................................... 148 Collision Avoidance................................................................................................................................... 152 Collision Avoidance (Advanced) ............................................................................................................... 155 Edge Pierce............................................................................................................................................... 156 Skeleton Cut-Up........................................................................................................................................ 157 Skeleton Cut-Up - Skeleton Grid............................................................................................................... 161 Skeleton Cut-Up - Cut Sequence.............................................................................................................. 162 Crop........................................................................................................................................................... 163 Costing ...................................................................................................................................................... 166 CNC Output............................................................................................................................................... 168 CNC Output - Pre-Pierces......................................................................................................................... 176 CNC Output - Auto Height Control............................................................................................................ 177 CNC Output - Step and Repeat ................................................................................................................ 179 CNC Output - Output Axis......................................................................................................................... 179 CNC Output - Subroutines ........................................................................................................................ 180 CNC Output - Microjoint / Plate Handler ................................................................................................... 182 CNC Output - DXF Output ........................................................................................................................ 184 Editing process settings ............................................................................................................................ 185 Process Parameters.................................................................................................................................. 186 Interior/Exterior Leads............................................................................................................................... 187 Cutting Techniques ................................................................................................................................... 189 Common Line Cut ..................................................................................................................................... 190 Common Line Cut - Plate Edge ................................................................................................................ 194 Common Line Cut - Array ......................................................................................................................... 195 Common Line Cut - Safety Cuts ............................................................................................................... 197 Chaining .................................................................................................................................................... 199

Bridging ..................................................................................................................................................... 200 AutoTab..................................................................................................................................................... 201 Chapter 8: AutoNesting ......................................................................................................................... 206 Start AutoNest... (Yellow Icon) .................................................................................................................. 206 AutoNest Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 206
How should ProNest create new nests? .............................................................................................................206

Use a custom plate ................................................................................................................................... 207 Torch settings............................................................................................................................................ 207 Start AutoNest (Green Icon)...................................................................................................................... 208 Part Properties (for all selected parts) ...................................................................................................... 208 Part Properties (for one selected part)...................................................................................................... 209 Part Properties (for one part in the Part List) ............................................................................................ 209 Chapter 9: Process Parameters............................................................................................................ 211 Default Process Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 211
Process Parameters XLS Table..........................................................................................................................211

Using Part, Plate and Pierce Separations with Multiple Processes.......................................................... 213 Using a Process Parameters XLS Table vs. Using Default Process Parameters .................................... 214 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................................ 215 Chapter 10: XLS Table Overview .......................................................................................................... 216 XLS Table Types....................................................................................................................................... 216
Using XLS Tables ...............................................................................................................................................216 General XLS Table Format .................................................................................................................................217 Using Wildcards ..................................................................................................................................................219 The Advantages and Disadvantages of Using XLS Tables.................................................................................220

Chapter 11: Pipe Settings and Fitting Descriptions ........................................................................... 221 Pipe Settings ............................................................................................................................................. 221 Fitting Descriptions.................................................................................................................................... 223
Offset Cone.........................................................................................................................................................223 Reducing Elbow ..................................................................................................................................................225 ID_OD Ellipse .....................................................................................................................................................227 Ellipse in Rectangle ............................................................................................................................................228 Flange .................................................................................................................................................................229 Angled Pipe.........................................................................................................................................................230 Straight Pipe .......................................................................................................................................................231 Offset Pipe ..........................................................................................................................................................232 Rectangle to Round ............................................................................................................................................234 Segmented Elbow...............................................................................................................................................236 Tee Into Partial Pipe ...........................................................................................................................................238 Y-Joint.................................................................................................................................................................239 Trapezoid to Round ............................................................................................................................................241

Chapter 12: Costing ............................................................................................................................... 244 Costing Settings ........................................................................................................................................ 244

Advanced Costing...............................................................................................................................................245 Required column headers in the costing XLS table ............................................................................................246

Chapter 13: Cutting Techniques........................................................................................................... 247 General Description .................................................................................................................................. 247
Available Types of Cutting Techniques ...............................................................................................................247

Record Matching ....................................................................................................................................... 249
The Base Condition ............................................................................................................................................249

Interaction with Process Parameters ........................................................................................................ 251 Interaction with CFF .................................................................................................................................. 251 Putting It All Together................................................................................................................................ 252 Profile Area ............................................................................................................................................... 254 Profile Type ............................................................................................................................................... 255 Multiple Materials ...................................................................................................................................... 255 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................................................ 255 Chapter 14: Lead Style Settings ........................................................................................................... 258
Default Lead Style Settings.................................................................................................................................258

Record Matching ....................................................................................................................................... 260 Units Conversion....................................................................................................................................... 261
The Default Lead Style Settings Record .............................................................................................................262 Multiple Process Considerations.........................................................................................................................262 Material/Thickness ..............................................................................................................................................263 Settings saved with a job ....................................................................................................................................263

Troubleshooting: ....................................................................................................................................... 264 Chapter 15: Database Filtering ............................................................................................................. 265 Chapter 16: Summary of Key Strokes.................................................................................................. 266 Chapter 17: Technical Support............................................................................................................. 267

.

easy to use editing and productivity tools. Lead In/Out Ramp Up/Down etc. “Fly by Help”. Plate and Pierce Separation Control Interactive and Automatic Plate Cropping Basic Multi-Torch Support Safe Zones for Material Clamping Applications Automatic and Interactive Process Sequencing Auto-Shift Lead In/Out Locations Edit Lead In/Out Position/Style/Size. Material. Process Parameters with Quality Support Material-Based Cutting Techniques (Corner. Thickness) from CAD drawing Material-Based Automatic Lead In/Out Style and Size Definition Variable (Parametric) Shape Part Creation Advanced “Drag and Drop” Nesting Part Interference Detection and “Bumping” “Tool Tips”. IGES. Tabs Edit Entity Quality. Waterjet Routers and Combination Plasma-Punch/Laser-Punch. DXF. Corner Loops. The combination of best-of-class material utilization. Properties (Quantity. and uniquely flexible control over cutting techniques. Plasma.) User Configurable CNC Post-Processor Basic Serial RS-232 DNC Download Capability .0 Introduction The ProNest system has been specifically designed to meet the most demanding requirements of 2-axis profile cutting applications including Laser. ProNest fully automates the import of part geometry from popular CAD systems as well as from existing CNC files.O. powerful. DSTV) and CNC Import Assign B. Delete Entities and Profiles.1 Chapter 1: Introduction to ProNest 8. Close Open Profiles Animated Cutting Sequence Simulation Standard and Customizable Shop Reports Spreadsheet-Based.M. ProNest Features and Options ProNest Standard Features • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Automatic CAD (including DWG. and Right-Click Pop-Up Context Menus Independent Part. cutting parameters and CNC output make ProNest the ideal solution for any manufacturer or fabricator. Oxy-fuel.

2 ProNest Optional Features Automatic Nesting Modules • • • Pattern Array Advanced Rectangular Nesting Advanced True Shape Nesting Productivity Modules • • • • • • • • • • Common Line Cutting Advanced Common Line Cutting Chain Cutting Bridge Cutting Collision Avoidance Variable Multi-Head Cutting Skeleton Cut-Up Work Zones Entity Smoothing and Reduction Part Cut-Up Material and Inventory Optimization Modules • • • • • Plate Inventory Part Inventory and Assembly Custom Remnants Nest Background Image Nesting System Optimization System Interface Modules • • • • • PIPE – Parametric Fitting Module Punch/Plasma or Punch/Laser Rotary Bevel Rotary Axis Manufacturing System Interface 3D CAD Interface Modules • • • SolidWorks Interface AutoCAD Inventor Interface Pro/Engineer Interface .

5 or later Administrative privileges on the system 512 megabytes of RAM or greater Super VGA monitor (with the screen set to at least 800 x 600 and 256 colors) Installation Procedure 1. Type D:\setup (substitute the appropriate letter of your CD drive for D). From the Taskbar Start menu.3 Installing ProNest Recommended System Requirements For successful installation of ProNest. Follow the on-screen instructions. By default. 2. 3. • • • • • Intel Pentium® based computers Internet Explorer 5. 5. if it does proceed to step 5. choose Run. Close all programs. 4. ProNest is installed in the following location: C:\Program Files\MTC\ProNest 8 . your computer should meet the following minimum system requirements: • Microsoft® Windows® XP (recommended) or Windows 2000 (recommended) with Service Pack 4. 6. The Setup program should start automatically. Insert the CD labeled ProNest into the CD-ROM drive.

After filling in the requested information. .com After entering the authorization code that we provide to you. You may use any of the alternative methods shown below to contact MTC and obtain your authorization: Phone: Fax: E-Mail: (716) 434-3755 (716) 434-3711 authorizations@mtc-software. click on OK to begin running ProNest. The site code shown above is for demonstration purposes only. Click on the ‘Request Authorization Code’ button prompting you with an authorization request window. click on Submit to quickly and easily request an authorization code. After the program is first installed on your computer. simply double-click on the ProNest icon displayed on your desktop or click on Start from the WINDOWS taskbar. This will display all current MTC products installed. click to open the ProNest sub-folder and then on the ProNest program icon. it must be authorized before you can use it.4 Starting ProNest To run ProNest. click on Programs and highlight MTC Products.

Authorize To Authorize ProNest 8. Close all programs. click to open the ProNest sub-folder and then on the ProNest program icon. which can be reached at techsupport@mtc-software. choose Run. any questions may be directed to MTC’s technical support staff. As always. simply double-click on the ProNest icon displayed on your desktop or click on Start from the WINDOWS taskbar. This will display all current MTC products installed. 2. click on the e-mail link in the License Configuration screen and paste the Site Code into the appropriate field or call the phone number provided. Type D:\setup (substitute the appropriate letter of your CD drive for D). . the installation procedures are: 1. The Setup program should start automatically. 5.com or 716-434-3755. From the Taskbar Start menu. Insert the CD labeled ProNest into the CD-ROM drive. Follow the on-screen instructions. 4. 6.5 Chapter 2: Quick Start Procedures This chapter is designed as a quick reference in beginning to use ProNest 8. Start To run ProNest. Install. Start and Authorize ProNest 8 Install As mentioned in Chapter 1. if it does proceed to step 5. 3. click on Programs and highlight MTC Products.

• Click on “Add or Remove Processes…” to open the ProNest Machine Wizard. .6 Settings GO TO JOB=>SETTINGS The ProNest Settings window opens. • Assign the correct controller (cff) file and select the processes that are available on your machine and click “Next”.

• Click on “Nesting” page and assign the init point of the nest. Click on “Finished” to exit the wizard. • Click on the “CNC Output” page and then on the “Output Files” tab and assign the appropriate CNC File Extension. . GO TO JOB=>EDIT PART LIST The Edit Part List screen opens. Click on “Save” and then “OK” to exit the Settings.7 • You can map previous process settings as a starting point for any process or simply select “New Process” and default settings will be used.

dragging. Click on “Return to Nesting”. GO TO JOB=>EDIT PLATE LIST The Edit Plate List screen opens . • Add part(s) to the Part List by double clicking. or multiple selecting the file name then clicking on the “Add Parts” icon.8 • Navigate to the folder where the CAD files are stored. • Change the material/thickness in the Part List by clicking on the down arrow in the Material field. • • Assign the correct quantity to each part.

Click on “Return to Nesting”. • • Click on “Add”.9 • Click on the Rectangular plate icon and specify the plate sizes you want to use. . then “Close”.

• Then click on “OK”. .10 MAIN PRONEST WINDOW To Auto-nest: • OR • For a settings dialog window. Click on the green Auto-nest icon in the top row of icons to use the default settings. click on the yellow Auto-nest icon and make any changes necessary.

Use the handles in the corners to rotate the part in different ways. • • Drag the part from the Part Bin to the plate.11 To Manually nest • Click on the “New Nest” icon in the top row of icons. Specify the plate sizes/materials. and the safe zone scheme and click “OK”. their location. .

Click and drag the part into place. .12 • • • • Use the handles in the center to bump or drag. Name the file and click on “Save”. GO TO FILE=>SAVE JOB AS • • • This saves the job file. This file can be saved to any drive or folder. Repeat until all parts are nested. The arrow keys on the keyboard will bump the part as well.

Name the file and click on “Save”. This file can be saved to any drive or folder.13 GO TO FILE=>OUTPUT CNC • • • This creates the machine code file (CNC file) to be sent to the cutting machine. .

units of measure. modes of operation. If your mouse is within the snap distance of a corner.14 Chapter 3: Preferences Preferences are basic settings used to tailor ProNest’s language. General Options <need text> Mouse Control These values are in screen pixels that represent more or less physical distance depending on how much you are currently zoomed in or out. These preferences remain in effect regardless of which settings files you are using. This is used to determine whether you are selecting a corner when moving a lead in/out position for example. . Selection tolerance Corner snap distance This represents the maximum distance from an item your mouse may be and still select it. and general appearance. the selected point will be the corner.

You can select the warnings for different actions that you do. if the cutting machine has work clamps to grip the material. Inventory folder Warnings ProNest can display warning messages to help prevent you from doing things like deleting all nests inadvertently. . Checking this option will turn off the warning message for that action in your preferences. Safe zones are defined regions of the plate where parts are not placed.15 Miscellaneous Options Safe zone file Displays the safe zone file that is available in ProNest. Safe zone files contain a list of safe zones. For instance. Displays the path where inventory files will be stored. On each of warning message dialogs there is a check box not to display the warning message again. or do not want to see by checking or un-checking the appropriate checkbox on the Warnings Tab. an area around each clamp can be defined to prevent parts from being nested within those zones. You can turn the optional warning back on from the Warnings Tab of Preferences.

menus and reports will be displayed in that language. ProNest screens. Allows the user to determine the fonts the application will be displayed in. s) and MMKS (mm. kg. Choices are IPS (in. Display Units Font Decimal places Precision determines how many decimal places are used by ProNest when displaying numeric values on the screen and in reports. This value controls how numeric values are interpreted and displayed by ProNest. lb.16 Regional Translation and Display Settings Language Use this pull-down list to choose the language you wish to use. When you select a new language and click on OK. . Length Weight Cost The number of digits after the decimal place for values representing lengths. The number of digits after the decimal place for values representing currency. The number of digits after the decimal place for values representing weight or mass. Your current Windows locale settings also affect the appearance of numeric and currency values.. s).

17 Settings The Settings tab shows the path where the machine information and each of the spreadsheet settings folders are stored. Options The Machine folder must point to the location on your computer or network where your machines settings are saved. as well as the location of the inventory folder. but may need to be changed for network-type installations. ProNest will not be able to run. These values will normally be set correctly upon installation. ProNest will prompt you for the desired machine when you start the program. make sure the box is checked. costing. lead in/out styles and cutting techniques. Spreadsheet Settings Folders ProNest uses spreadsheets (in . If the ‘Prompt for machine at startup’ is checked. Once the machine folder is specified. Select the folder ProNest should search to locate each of these types of files.XLS format) to obtain information for process parameters. Select the folder where your CFF (Controller Format Files) are located. select a machine to be your default machine when you start ProNest. . To use Microsoft Excel spreadsheets to modify any of these settings. If this folder is invalid or is empty.

Be careful not to select colors that will make it difficult to see your part. for example.18 Bevel Bevel Colors Control the colors used by ProNest to draw bevel angles on a part. selecting white for a bevel angle range will not work when your plate is also white. . Simply click on the down arrow next to the screen elements and select the desired color for that item.

Click on OK to close the New Job dialog and the Add Parts window will appear. Add Parts We’ve provided sample CAD DXF files in both English and Metric in your ProNest 8\Examples folder. The new job dialog screen will appear. and in some cases by using a right-click pop-up menu. or using the array function. By matching the layer name with the correct process. scribe and punch marks. . These CAD files were drawn using specific layer names for different attributes such as profiles that are to be cut. deleting the selected parts. ProNest can distinguish the different aspects of the drawing and display (and output) the part properly. select the same machine you did while reviewing settings in the Quick Start guide. Most functions are available through the menus and toolbars. Starting a New Job To start a new job. or click on the New Job icon on your toolbar. and they can serve as an example of how to properly layer your DXF or DWG drawing files. ProNest also uses special mouse cursors when the pointer is over the nesting handles of a selected part or group of parts. click on New Job in the File menu.19 Chapter 4: ProNest Basics ProNest provides several ways to accomplish most tasks like starting a new job. For the purposes of learning ProNest. Hints. dimension information etc. You can use these files while you learn ProNest. Enter a descriptive name for this job and select the appropriate machine by clicking on the down arrow of the combo box and clicking on the desired name. or “fly-by-help” are displayed when you position the mouse cursor over a toolbar icon for a short period of time to help you understand and learn its meaning.

The sample DXF files should now appear in the window. you can do so by clicking on the view menu icon to the right of the “Look In” combo box. and Lead information) When a part is selected in the Part List it will also be displayed in the preview window.20 Select “AutoCAD files” as your filter. Adding to Your Parts List There are several ways to add the parts in the Explorer view to your parts list. If you prefer to view a list of files. click the Favorites button (the one with the star on it). or by selecting one or more files and dragging them into the parts list. you may use the Favorites functionality to store them in a list. CAD Import. For now. When you want to quickly switch to that folder. Typically. simply click on the Favorites button and select the folder from the list. and existing CNC format files). Defining the material can be important if the job requires parts cut from different . A single click on the part name will provide a preview. however. Explorer View The explorer view can be modified depending on personal preference. use the “Look in” combo box and Explorer View to navigate to the \Program Files\MTC\ProNest 8\Examples folder just as you would in Windows Explorer. we’ll focus on how to add CAD files to your part list.” The currently visible folder will be added to your list of favorites. and for now. and select Add to Favorites. You can double-click on a part. If there are several folders that you commonly pull files from. Under the preview are drawing properties that can be modified prior to adding the part to the part list (Nest. Navigate to the desired folder. you will at least need to change the quantity (Qty) for the part. select one or more parts (use the shift and control keys as you would in Windows Explorer) and then click on the Add icon. The diagram above shows detail view. size and type of file along with the date last modified. which includes the part name. or large or small icons. The properties of the part can also be viewed and changed in both the table view and the Properties window. ProNest also accepts other types of files (MTC token files.

) need to be output. or untrimmed intersections) in the drawing and empty drawing file (the layers used on the CAD drawing do not match the layers ProNest expects to see. kerf values. you can use the preview window to edit the part. Close this window to restore the preview to its normal size. the Messages tab at the bottom of the Explorer view window becomes active. Clicking this icon returns to the previous zoomed view. Open profiles can be located in the preview window if the open profiles box is checked under the view menu. The two most common error messages are open profiles (gaps. as defined in the CAD Import settings). Select the appropriate material (click in the material field. . Select Mode This mode allows you to select cutting profiles so that you can review or change the lead in/out properties for that profile. With a part in the list selected. it is easy to get a closer look at the part and it’s properties. The toolbar above the Preview window allows you to select profiles. This mode allows you to select new locations for the lead in/out positions for your part just by clicking on a new location. move lead in/out positions. zoom in and out. Select mode is restored after you have zoomed in. Clicking on this tab provides a descriptive text of the problem. Move Leads Mode Area Zoom Zoom Out No Zoom Maximize/Minimize Advanced Edit With the preview window maximized. overlaps. This view makes editing the part lead in/out positions and/or it’s properties much easier. Preview Messages When a part is drawn incorrectly.21 materials or process parameters (feed rates. This ensures that parts will only be nested on plates sharing the same material record. Clicking on this icon will take you to an Advanced Edit feature of ProNest allowing the properties of the part to be further modified. then click on the arrow) from the material database. Clicking this icon will maximize or minimize the preview and properties windows. Clicking this icon allows you to zoom in on an area of your part by dragging out a box around the desired area. An empty drawing file message will not display a preview of the part. (see the Advanced Edit section at the end of this chapter for more detail). and enter advanced edit. Clicking this icon returns to the full view of the part. etc.

Add VSP (Variable Shape Part) Part to Part List The variable shape definition feature allows you to easily define the geometry for common shapes just by entering a few dimensions. The context sensitive reference dimensions and input hints lead you through each step of the process. and Cost information. or the Edit Part List icon. In seconds you have complete part geometry ready to nest.22 When a part from the part list is selected. Clicking on the VSP tab will display a window with a list of VSP parts provided with ProNest. Leads. It will also display the part reference screen with a table of shape input values for part definition. The Variable Shape Program portion of ProNest displays a list of standard part shapes for selection with a part reference view for the currently selected shape. the part properties window allows changing Nest. . as shown in the window that follows. Add VSP Part to Current Nest To add a VSP part to the current nest. click on Edit Part List from Job.

or by double clicking on the part. Define Part The above window appears after clicking on Add Part.23 A VSP part can be selected by either highlighting the part desired and clicking on Add Part. The Input Value Table contains all of the dimension values . This is where the required part information is to be entered.

As the part is edited the preview window is updated. you may click on the Cut Process button to select the type of cutting to be done on this part. In this case. Define Cut Process After the part is set to the desired specifications. A pop up window appears allowing the cut process for the interior and exterior profiles to be determined. the reference window at the top right of the screen shows the dimension that is currently being defined and a descriptive prompt appears on the bottom of the screen. The values displayed have been edited to differ from the default values. with the input value editable fields in the column on the right side of the table. and set the initial start point of the interior profile in the pull down box. select Add Cut Out. From the Shape Reference windows. Click on OK to return to the shape reference window. we have chosen.24 being defined in the left side column. As each value is selected. . Circle and Top. A pop up window appears to allow the selection of the interior profile and the position of it’s start point. The part list provided is the standard list of VSP parts. Any errors will be displayed and the preview will vanish. or ProNest will allow the VSP part to be renamed. Part Name The part name can remain unchanged. which is very useful for multi-process machines such as those utilizing plasma and hi-def plasma. Selecting OK will put the VSP part into the part list. Define Interior Profile VSP will allow interior profiles to be added to the VSP part in current view. Highlight the desired part. respectively.

set the editable values in the same manner as the original part. . Notice the part preview window reflects any changes that are made.25 With the interior profile now visible.

The rigorous mathematical approach used by Pipe. Optional forming and alignment marks can also be added to assist in down-stream manufacturing operations. When the preview window displays the part you wish to create. reducing both fabrication and finishing time. clicking on the remove part icon will also remove selected VSP parts. Add Pipe Part to Part List The Pipe parametric library for ProNest is designed to automatically generate CNC flatplate developments for fabricated. . with Sheave being the second. even an inexperienced user can develop complex fittings in only seconds. click on OK to return to the Variable Shape Parts window. welded. curve smoothing and line-to-arc conversion yield unsurpassed part fit-up. In the example displayed below. The Add Parts window will appear with the new part being previewed. automatic part splitting.26 More than one interior profile may be entered in the same manner. then click Remove Part. The part(s) will no longer be added to the current nest. At this point. Circle was the first interior profile added. The arrows in the top right corner of the screen will move you through the different profiles available for editing. By simply entering dimensions into the fill-in-the-blanks style form with context-sensitive reference dimensions and input hints. combined with features like material thickness compensation. As with CAD files. right-click on the part(s). click on OK. Delete VSP part from Part List Any defined VSP part being added to the nest will be listed in the Add Parts list. When the properties for this part have been determined. and the quantity to be added to the current nest has been set. To remove a part from this list. The values for both files were modified. you can add additional VSP parts. cylindrical pipe joints and transitions used in Blowpipe applications.

click on Edit/Part List from File. and the Angled Pipe. extensions and laps. rectangular and boot (take-off) tees can be added to Pipes. A Pipe part can be selected by either double clicking on the diagram of the part. conical. Cones. . Clicking on Add Part will enter Pipe where values can be defined. or clicking on the diagram and then click Add Part. Add Pipe Part to Current Nest To add a Pipe part to the current nest. Clicking on the Pipe icon displays a window with a list of Pipe parts provided with ProNest. tilts.27 Each fitting is designed with flexibility in mind and includes powerful features like offsets. as shown in the window below. Cylindrical. A single click will display the shape in the preview window.

Right clicking on the preview window will allow you to zoom. which is very useful for multi-process machines such as those that utilize plasma and hi-def plasma. As the part is edited the preview window (below the reference screen) is updated. Define Cut Process After the part is set to the desired specifications. unzoom or measure. or ProNest will allow the Pipe part to be renamed.28 Define Part The above window appears after clicking on Add Part. A pop up window appears allowing the cut process for the interior and exterior profiles to be determined. you may click on the Cut Process button to select the type of cutting to be done on this part. The Value Table has all dimension values to be defined in the left side column. This is where the required part information is to be entered. As each value is selected. . Quantity Enter the desired number of the current part to be added to the nest. and errors will be displayed in the preview window (in lieu of the part). the reference window to the right of the value table shows the dimension that is currently being defined and a descriptive prompt appears on the bottom of the screen. with the editable input value fields in the column on the right side of the table. Part Name The part name can remain unchanged. Define Lead-In/Out The default lead settings or the XLS leads are applied to pipe parts.

The two arrows immediately left of the Add Tee button allow the user to view the different profiles that have already been created. When the preview window displays the part you wish to create. set the values of the tee in the same manner the original part was defined. The list provided is the standard list of Pipe tees. From the Shape Reference window. The two arrows above the reference window allow the user to view the dimensions input for each of the profiles. A pop up window appears to allow the selection of the tee to be added . When the properties for this part have been determined. regardless what Pipe shape was previously selected. Clicking on Save will create a . left or right to view the part from a different perspective by simply clicking on the appropriate arrow button. As the part is edited. Highlight the desired tee. select Add Tee (if grayed out. In addition to Zoom. . you can choose to view the shape as either a solid or wire frame. click on the Save… button. down. click on OK. Pipe will also allow you to rotate the part up.PJB file. View By clicking on the 3D View tab above the layout view. As each value is selected. to be opened. Clicking on the Load… button allows the selection of any . Tees can be deleted by clicking on Delete Tee. Add Tee Pipe allows tees to be added to certain Pipe parts. the reference window to the right of the value table shows the dimension that is currently being defined and a descriptive prompt appears on the bottom of the screen.PJB file. after clicking OK. Pipe will allow you to zoom in and/or out by right clicking the mouse and selecting ‘Zoom’. Saving/Loading Pipe Part If the input values of this development need to be saved for future jobs or part verification. the preview window (below the reference) is updated. The Add Parts window will appear with the new part being previewed.29 Settings Clicking on Settings will allow you to view or modify the current Pipe settings. Refer to the Pipe Settings and Fitting Descriptions for complete descriptions of these settings. the selected PIPE part does not allow the addition of tees). displaying any errors in the status bar. another pipe part can be selected. Select a path and name for the file.

Accepting the Part List When all parts have been added to the part list with correct quantities. or click on Return to Nesting. and thickness of the plate(s) needed for the job. you can select from one of the plates you defined in your plate list. similar to the way the part list was created. The plate can be named and defined as either rectangular or circular (plate type). or to continue nesting on a new plate when the current plate is full. The part will no longer be added to the current nest. highlight the part. close out of the Add Parts screen by clicking on the return to nesting button or the “x” in the upper right corner. Interactive Nesting Interactive Nesting allows you to place parts on the screen and position them where desired. These can include rectangular and circular plates. along with remnants (crops) and skeletons created in ProNest. Inventory If the part and plate inventory option is active. Accepting the Plate List When all plates have been added to the list. This returns the user to the main nesting screen with the selected parts in the part bin to the left of the plate. click on “X”. A quantity can be assigned. length and width can be defined and rotation angles can be determined (useful for remnants). or select New Nest… from the Nest Menu. then click on the Remove Part Icon. The user can now define the material. Custom remnants may also be defined and added. select close from the file menu. Deleting a Plate Record from the Plate List A record can be removed from the plate list by selecting the record(s) then clicking on the remove plate icon. To remove a part from this list. size. material and properties. Select 1 or multiple plates (using the shift or CTRL keys) then click on the Add Plate icon (or double click on the record) to add to the plate list. Use New Nest to select a different plate size. the plate can be added to the plate list on the bottom by clicking the Add Plate icon. Add Plates User Defined Selecting Edit Plate List from File or clicking on the Edit Plate List icon brings up the Add Plate screen. Once defined.30 Delete Pipe part from Part List Any defined Pipe parts to be added to the nest will be listed in the Part List. Starting a New Nest To start a new nest. or it can be done before or after automatic nesting if you have that option. You can interactively nest all of your parts. select a size defined in your . click on the New Nest icon. Single clicking on a record displays the plate in the preview window. When the New Nest dialog window appears. plates can be added from a list previously defined in the plate inventory database.

there is an option to ‘Use AutoBump’. If these options are not currently in view. only parts that match the material description are shown in the part bin. (note: the current size and material is displayed above the plate). Keep in mind that in the Settings | Nesting dialog. Other options available include “Show Hints for Parts”. . the line. Matching Material If the material defined for the parts in the part bin match the material defining the current plate. and “Torch Settings”. ProNest will allow these parts to be nested. the part will be placed wherever you release the mouse button. When you click on OK. ProNest provides the capability of filtering the part list by material type through the filter by material box found immediately above the parts. and picture of the part will be gray and ProNest will not allow these parts to be nested. click on the bar with the double arrows immediately above the top part in the list. The default is “No Filter” which allows the display of all parts. an empty plate will be displayed on your ProNest desktop. “Hide Depleted Parts”. filename. by double clicking on the part in the Part Bar or by selecting a part and pressing the Enter key. If the auto-bump option is not activated. or enter the dimensions.31 preferences. If a filter is chosen. If this option is checked. If the material or thickness defined for the parts differs from that of the current plate. a blue line should appear to the left of the part and the name and picture will be black. the part will be bumped in the directions defined in that setting when it is first placed on the plate. Adding Parts to the Nest Parts displayed in the part bar and matching the current plate material can be easily added to the nest by left clicking on the desired part and dragging it to the nesting area.

To unselect a part. or in an interlocking manner with another part. To select a part that has been nested. Selecting and Unselecting a Group of Parts Selected groups of parts are built and modified using shift select to toggle the selection state of individual parts. Clicking outside the plate is preferred. To do this. To add a part to the selected group. Area Select You can also select one or more parts by dragging a rectangular window using the Right mouse key. Once selected. click within the interior of the desired part. click on it with the left mouse button. To remove a part from the group.. as it eliminates the possibility of picking another part by mistake. holding the Shift key down while choosing a part only affects the selection state of the individual part. The use of the nesting handles will be described later in this section. just as a single part. hold . shift select that part. This is especially helpful if the desired part is nested inside of. deleted.32 Selecting and Unselecting a Part Only parts that appear on the plate can be selected. the group is treated as one part and can be moved. While picking a part unselects other parts. hold down the shift key and select the second part with the left mouse button. click anywhere outside of the part region. To prevent choosing the wrong part. position the mouse cursor at one corner of the desired area. the part (or parts) are drawn in the selected part color and the nesting handles appear at the corners and sides of the part region. Once selected in this manner. duplicated. A selected part can be unselected by choosing another part. A selected part can also be unselected by pressing the Enter key. continuing this process until all of the desired parts appear in the selected state. rotated. etc.

If you select from right to left. or select the No Zoom item from the View menu.33 the right mouse button down and move the mouse to the opposite corner of the area and release the mouse button. click on the Area Zoom icon on your toolbar. Dynamic Zoom Dynamic zooming allows you to easily zoom in and out at any desired location on your nest. Zoom to Selected To zoom in on a selected part or group of parts. or select the Zoom Out item from the View menu. Each time you press the page up or down keys you will zoom in or out more. choose Unselect All. click on the Zoom Selected icon on your toolbar. or select the Area Zoom item from the View menu. Zoom Out To zoom out (return to the previous magnification level). You may also dynamically zoom by using the mouse wheel. the parts in the selection area will be added to the selected group. Dynamic zooming is very useful when you are in a mode like Move Leads. Zooming out means to return to a previous level of magnification. No Zoom To return to a view of the entire plate. click on the No Zoom icon on your toolbar. if your mouse is so equipped. click on the Zoom Out icon on your toolbar. Position the mouse pointer at the center of the zoom region. Rolling the mouse wheel up (away from you) will zoom in and rolling it down (towards you) will zoom out. Zooming In and Out Zooming in allows you to examine smaller areas of your nest by magnifying them to fill the desktop area of ProNest. Just position the mouse cursor at the center of the area and press the Page Up or Page Down keys. all parts contained or whose region intersects the selection area will become selected. . choose the Select All menu item from the Edit menu. If you select the area by moving from the left to the right. To unselect all parts. all parts entirely contained in the selection area will become selected. Area Zoom To zoom in on a selected (rectangular) area of the plate. or select the Zoom Selected item from the View menu. If you hold the shift key down while using area select. Selecting or Unselecting all Parts To select all parts on the current nest.

and the bump and rotation handles disappear. if you slide the part using the left middle bump handle. A part must be selected before most operations can be performed on it. These parts are referred to as the selected group. not vertically. select the middle handle on the left side of the selected group. The selected group will move left until it is a specified separation away from another part or the plate edge.e. The group is surrounded by eight “handles”. Delete Nest To delete the current nest. Moving (Using Slide) If you click and hold the mouse button down on one of the middle bump handles you can slide it horizontally or vertically without changing its position in the other direction. The selected parts are redrawn in the specified moving color. drag the group with the mouse until it is in the desired location. Bumping In ProNest. This is a dragging state. select Delete Nest from Nest.. and so on. press the Delete key or choose Delete from the edit menu. Only exterior profiles of these parts are visible while they are being moved. You can also bump by using the arrow keys. plate edge.34 Working With Selected Parts During interactive nesting. Parts that are completely off the plate will not bump. Delete To delete the selected group or part. Moving (Dragging) To move the selected group or part. To move up by the nudge distance. Releasing the left mouse button returns the selected group to a normal selected state in the new location. all operations effect the selected parts. To bump. to move left. one at each corner and the center of each side. the part can only be moved horizontally. it will not bump. The part. the left edge if bumping left) is already in conflict. hold down the shift key and press the UP ARROW key (or click on the top-center bump handle). press the LEFT ARROW key. to bump left. click inside a part in the selected group and hold down the left mouse button. The selected group will move the amount given by the Nudge Distance setting in the Nesting tab of the Settings screen. Moving (Using Nudge) The selected group can also be moved a pre-defined distance by using the shift key with arrow keys or the bump handles. For example. Still holding down the left mouse button. or selecting the desired bump direction under part. . click on the desired middle handle of the selected part or group. For example. bumping means to move a part in a desired direction until it is the specified separation from other parts or the plate edge. or select the Delete Nest Icon. If the leading edge of a part (i. and pierce separations used can be found in the process parameter settings for the chosen cut process (see chapter 7 settings overview).

Sometimes it may be desirable to reverse the cutting direction. and a copy of it will be placed slightly offset from the original. The selected group is mirrored on a vertical axis. Generally. Clustering A cluster may be created by grouping multiple parts in the selected state. it can be treated as an individual part. The selected group will be unselected. . arrayed. for example. When this is done. all parts are free to be nested again. Clusters are also added to the part list and can then be used in automatic nesting. select Delete All Nests from Nest. select Duplicate from the Parts pull down menu. or clicking on the Cluster icon. etc. or select the Delete All Nests Icon. then clicking on Cluster from the Parts menu. they will remain selected on the plate. which runs through the center of the selected group’s region. though the cluster still exists in the part bar and can be added to the plate at any time. Cutter kerf compensation left is also used as standard practice. Once a cluster is created. and kerf compensation right is used. duplicated. It can be bumped. the selected group will not be duplicated and the original part will remain selected.35 Delete All Nests To delete all nests. ProNest will process parts so that the interior cuts are done in a counterclockwise direction and exterior profiles in a clockwise direction. rotated. After Unclustering. Unclustering When a cluster of parts is selected and the Uncluster Icon is clicked (or Uncluster is selected from the Parts menu). Note: If a part or parts are selected when either delete nest function is used. These can be the same part or different parts. even though all other part are removed. in order to keep a part attached to the bulk of the plate as long as possible. the individual parts can again be unselected or selected individually. When the cut direction is reversed. Reverse Cut Direction The reverse cut direction feature is used to change the direction the selected part will be cut. The direction of cut can be displayed on the plate if Cut Direction is checked under the View menu. Unselecting any individual part in the cluster unselects the entire cluster. interior profiles are cut clockwise and exterior profiles counter-clockwise. Duplicating To duplicate the selected group or part. Mirroring To mirror the selected group or part. or select the Duplicate Parts Icon. the parts in that cluster are no longer permanently grouped together. select Mirror from Parts or select the Mirror Icon. or can be added interactively to the nest. If the selected group requires more of any of its parts than remain to be nested.

Set the torch spacing field to 0.36 Arraying To array. The selected group will rotate by the specified increment. stay closer to the center of the part or group. In Torches. 270° or 360°. The part rotates with the mouse. The part offset is calculated to place parts as close together as possible based on the part separation in your settings. Rotating by Increment . The current angle of the selected part/group is the total rotation from its initial angle. Rotating Parts or Part Groups All rotations occur in relation to the center point of the selected part or group. set “Number of Torches” to match what the machine has. Rotating to Next 90 . If the “+” Incremental Rotation Icon or the upper left handle are used. the initial angle of that part is used. Multiple Torches If the cutting machine has multiple torches of one process. If the part/group consists of multiple parts. move the mouse. keyboard. starting from its initial angle. Still holding down the left mouse button. The number in the Y direction is maximized to cover the plate height. select the upper right handle and hold down the left mouse button. 180°. place the selected part or group in the desired start location and select Array from Nest. The number of parts to place in the X and Y directions. the selected group rotates clockwise. or select the lower left handle.To rotate the selected part or group by a set increment. the torch settings feature allows ProNest to take advantage of this. If the selected part/group consists of one part. The Incremental Rotate Angle setting in the Preferences screen under Manual Nesting is used for the icon. For example. the initial angle is set to zero each time a part is added or removed from the group. move farther away from the center. Releasing the left mouse button returns the selected group to a normal selected state. Only exterior profiles of the parts are visible and the bump and rotate handles disappear. Drag a part . pressing “S” on the keyboard. Longest Straight Side – Clicking the Long Side Rotate Icon. This is a dragging state. The selected parts are redrawn in the moving color. the selected group rotates counter-clockwise. If the “-“ Incremental Rotation Icon is used. To rotate slowly. and upper left handle rotations. To rotate quickly. Pattern Array (Optional Feature) To Pattern Array. place the selected part or group in the desired start location and select Pattern Array from Nest. click on either the Incremental Rotation Icon. or the upper left handle. Open the Torch Settings combo box under the part list and select 2 for number of torches to be used on this plate. ProNest will then calculate an optimal arrangement of that part or group to maximize the number of copies that can be nested. or select the Pattern Array icon. select the Rotate To Next 90 Icon. or clicking the lower right “handle” will determine the selected part’s longest straight side and proceed to rotate that side to the next closest counterclockwise horizontal or vertical position. the hypotenuse of a right triangle will rotate to 90°. and the part offset (X & Y spacing) are calculated.To “free” rotate the selected group. or select the Array Icon. Free Rotate . Pattern Array will be discussed in detail in Chapter 5. under Settings. then click on OK. Press “Q” on the keyboard.To rotate the selected part/group to the next 90 degree increment greater than its current angle.

Click on the Cut Sequence Icon in your toolbar.37 over to the plate. This tool bar has special tools to help you change the cut sequence. allowing him to set up the machine properly. the program generates a cutting sequence for those parts based on your current settings. To return to normal Select Mode. the master being the darker color and the slave being the lighter. As an option. you can interactively change the cut sequence if desired. Just move the mouse cursor over the desired area and use the page up and down keys. To enter move leads mode. a stop code and comments are included that tell the operator what torch settings to use. simply click on the desired new location and the lead in/out will be automatically moved there. There should be two parts on the plate now. To move the lead in/out for an interior or exterior profile of a part. it is best to move leads prior to setting a cut sequence. If you need to zoom in on a profile to select the location properly. When a part is unsequenced. Move Lead In/Out Locations In addition to being able to move lead in/out locations in the Preview window while you are building your parts list. but like all other toolbars. MTC provides a variable multi-torch feature which can adjust both the number of torches and the spacing used automatically based on the size of the part being nested. When the nest is output to the machine. it will not have a sequence number displayed near the start point of the exterior profile and it will be drawn in the “unsequenced” color. ProNest will change the style (according to your settings) when you move from a side location to a corner or from a corner to a side. either manually or automatically. ProNest will display the Cut Sequence Toolbar. ProNest allows the user to manually modify the torch spacing and number of torches as different parts are nested. Dynamic zooming will not cancel Move Leads Mode. click on the Move Leads Mode icon in your toolbar or select the Move Leads Mode from the Edit menu. This can be modified by assigning a value for torch spacing. Cut Sequence When you nest parts in ProNest. you can also move them in the main nesting window. Even without the variable torch option. Normally it appears as a floating toolbar on your workspace area. you can click the Right mouse button. or click on the Select Mode icon in your toolbar. After your nesting is complete. it is usually best to use dynamic zooming. . The spacing between corresponding locations on the 2 parts is determined by the width of the plate divided by the number of torches. or select the Cut Sequence item from the Nest Menu. Note: Since moving leads will cause ProNest to generate a new cut sequence. it can be “docked”. You can now use the mouse to select parts and toggle them between sequenced and unsequenced mode by simply clicking on them. The current cut sequence for each part on your nest will be displayed.

Appends the unsequenced parts to the end of the cutting sequence. This allows you to move or insert the unsequenced part or parts into the cut sequence before an already sequenced part. You can use the Cut Sequence toolbar to edit that sequence. follow the prompts at the bottom of the taskbar to alter the cut sequencing.38 The cutting sequence determines the order in which individual parts on a nest will be cut. select (and therefore unsequence) those parts in the desired order. . Modifying the Cut Sequence To change the sequence of a few parts on the nest. Closes the cut sequence window and exits cut sequence mode. View Cut Sequence Insert Unsequenced Parts Before Append Unsequenced Parts to the End Clear Cut Sequence From Clear Cut Sequence Close Shows the order in which the parts will be cut. just click on each of those parts to unsequence them. When the Cut Sequence toolbar is displayed. The sequence numbers of all parts will be adjusted to show the new order. A pop up window also appears allowing the user to modify the cut sequence. To place a part or group of parts in a specific spot in the cut sequence. After selecting one of the icons. ProNest automatically calculates a sequence based on the current cut sequence settings. or to define the entire sequence manually. the cutting sequence is shown on the parts. Clears the cut sequence from a selected part to the end of the cutting sequence Clears the entire cut sequence for the current nest. and then click on those parts again to sequence them in the new order. Click the Insert Unsequenced Parts Before icon on the Cut Sequence Toolbar. and then click on the sequenced part the selected parts should immediately precede.

you should first click on the Clear Cut Sequence icon to unsequence all of the parts. the Cut Simulation tool bar will appear. A pop up window appears allowing the user to start. an animated torch will appear on the plate. You can also click on the Clear Cut Sequence From icon to clear the sequence for all parts starting with the part you click on next. Then simply click on the parts in the new order to sequence them. Determines the speed of the cut simulation. select (and therefore unsequence) those parts in the desired order. When the Cut Simulation toolbar is displayed. Closes the cut simulation window and exits cut simulation . Cut Simulation ProNest gives users the opportunity to view the path the machine takes as it performs its operations. Set Cut Sequence To explicitly set the cut sequence for all of the parts in the nest. The speed of the torch can be increased or decreased. Then Click the Append Unsequenced Parts to End icon and those parts will be shifted to the end of the cutting sequence. Pauses the cut simulation process.39 To move a part or group of parts to the end of the cut sequence. and will simulate the machine path used for the current nest. pause. After clicking on Play. stop and change the speed of the simulation. By clicking on Cut Simulation from View or the cut simulation icon. ProNest will automatically sequence any remaining unsequenced parts for you. Stops the cut simulation. the machine path is simulated on the plate. Play Pause Stop Speed Close Begin the cut simulation process. click on the Close button on the Cut Sequence toolbar. Exit Cut Sequence Mode To exit from Cut Sequence mode.

Start your crop by clicking below (or above) the plate edge. Measure Mode Measure mode is used to measure distances on your nest using the mouse cursor. An alternative to the single click method for defining the crop is to click down with the mouse button. The accuracy of the measurement is limited by the distance represented by one pixel on the screen. cropping is used to cut a usable portion of the plate away from the skeleton created by cutting out the parts. For example. and by how accurately you select the measurement points. To interactively crop a nest. drag out a line and then release the mouse button. this causes the resulting crop line to "snap to" the nearest horizontal. Interactive Cropping Interactive cropping allows you to create the path for the cropping cut by defining a series of linear motions. To exit crop mode. click the right mouse button. click on the Crop Mode icon on your toolbar. You can then simply click on a series of points to define the cut path. a cross-hair cursor will be drawn across the plate. Delete Crop To delete an existing crop for a nest. Finish the crop by clicking above (or below) the opposite plate edge for the last crop motion. . ProNest uses the settings on the Settings | Crop page to determine the best remnant that may be generated from the current nest. This may be overridden by modifying your cut sequence rules.40 mode. Cropping the Plate In ProNest. Repeatedly pressing the Backspace key will erase all of the crop points in the active crop so that you may choose a new starting location for the crop. This method allows you to see where each section of the crop cut will be before you release the mouse button. ProNest will automatically trim or extend the last crop line to the plate edge. AutoCrop The Autocrop option (under the nest menu) will add a cropping cut beyond the nested parts. Once in crop mode. Checking the Crop settings box for “Step 1: Find the best vertical crop” will result in a straight crop cut from the top to the bottom of the plate. you could use this to check part separation or a dimension on a part. The remnant plate created can then be easily used in ProNest by entering it as a custom plate size. or select the Crop item from the Nest menu. select the Delete Crop item from the Nest menu. When a crop is defined for a nest. While in the process of defining a crop. you may delete the most recently added crop point by pressing the Backspace key. the default sequence would place the crop at the end of the CNC file. vertical or 45 degree line. You can also hold the shift key down while using this method. ProNest will automatically start the cut at the plate edge for you. You can complete a crop at the right or left edge of the plate if desired.

. click on the New Nest icon (or select New Nest from the nest menu). Once in measure mode. The results will be displayed in the status bar. When the Output CNC dialog box appears you can navigate to the desired folder to which the files should be written. and the cropping cut. You can change this filename if desired. The filename will default to the file name used when you saved your job.41 To enter measure mode. The cursor will automatically “snap” to the edges of nested parts to make measuring from a part edge more exact. you can make a measurement by clicking down with the left mouse button. if one is defined. or change in Y) are displayed. click on the Measure Mode icon on your toolbar. To exit from measure mode and return to normal Select Mode. the DX (delta. CNC Output After you have completed nesting your job. dragging out a line. vertical. you can click the Right mouse button. or click on the Select Mode icon in your toolbar. To create the CNC files for the job. Note: It is often helpful to zoom in on the area being measured. These CNC files contain the instructions for your cutting machine to cut out the entire nest. and releasing the mouse button. While in measure mode. or 45 degree line. the distance (with the known accuracy). You can also hold the shift key down while using this method. Advance to a New Plate When the current plate is full and there are additional parts to be nested. or change in X) and the DY (delta. For each measurement. or “Untitled” if you have not yet saved it. Click on Save to create the CNC files. click on the Output CNC icon on your toolbar or select the Output CNC item from the File menu. you will want to create the CNC files for each nest. This too. Likewise. this causes the resulting measurement line to “snap to” the nearest horizontal. or select the Measure Mode item from the Edit menu. the filename will end with your default CNC extension from your settings. can be changed. ProNest will display cross-hairs across the desktop area and the mouse cursor will change to a measuring tape. A new plate can be selected and nesting can be continued.

ProNest will display a warning dialog box. Creating a Remnant or Skeleton A skeleton is the full plate minus the nested parts. if you have two nests and you entered TEST. ProNest would create two nests named TEST01. If existing files will be overwritten and you have asked to be warned about overwriting CNC files in your Preferences (Miscellaneous). All aspects of the nest including part geometry.CNC as the filename. You may right click on a particular nest to create remnants and skeletons just for that nest or you may create remnants and skeletons for all selected nests by clicking on the Save Remnants and Save Skeletons buttons on the bottom of the dialog. Creating Plate Inventory (optional feature) With this option. the desired folder to which the . A list of all available remnants and skeletons that have been or may be created will appear in a list. This file can be opened at any time by clicking on the Open Job icon or selecting Open Job from the File menu. the nest(s) can be modified in any way or the entire job can be unnested and renested in a different manner. and settings are saved. either by right clicking on a nest in the list and choosing one of the Discard options or by clicking on the Discard Remnants and Discard Skeletons buttons on the bottom of the dialog. the entire job can be saved by either clicking on the Save Job icon or selecting Save Job under the File menu. if any remnants and skeletons have been created. Custom remnants can be created in both the New Nest and Autonest setup screens. At this time. After cropping the plate. the remnant (drop) may be saved to the plate inventory database by selecting Remnants and Skeletons… under Job. Note that the plate does not need to be cropped in order to create the skeleton.NIF file is written can be selected. ProNest will first truncate the filename so that the resulting name is not longer than eight characters. In each of these screens you have the Remnant option when selecting the custom plate drop-down menu. you will be given the option of updating them in your plate inventory database. For example. Saving A Job/Opening A Job When the nesting is done. and are using a default CNC extension. Remnants and skeletons for any nest may be discarded in a similar fashion. Click on OK to replace the existing files. ProNest will append a number to the filename. Custom Remnants A custom remnant is a partial plate of material available in inventory. . If the option to “Use Long Filenames” is not checked in the CNC output section of your settings. This restores the job as it was saved.42 If you have more than one nest. or Cancel to exit without writing any CNC files. plate information.CNC and TEST02. During the CNC output process. should it need to be changed. When the Save Job As… dialog appears.CNC. you can save remnants and/or skeletons from nest material to a database for use in ProNest at a later time.

and the cutting sequence number for each part. weight. select the Reports item from the File menu. Nest Plot This report shows an image of each nest. and production cost information for each of the nexts in the job. and the cutting sequence number for each part. print the report. the plate size and material information. A list of the nested parts in cut sequence order is also displayed. Single-Head Nest Detail Single Head Nest Sequence Multi-Head Nest Detail Job Summary Part Detail Part Summary . This report provides summaries of the utilizations. you can use the icons in the toolbar to view each page. the plate size and material information. material. This report shows an image of each nest. Provides dimensions. and of course. and additional information along with a part picture. Provides similar information to the Part Detail report. This report shows an image of each nest. This report shows an image of each nest. quantities. change your printer (or its properties). To view a report. Simply click on the preview icon to the left of the desired report to preview it on your screen. a sub-menu with each report will be displayed. the plate size and material information. the plate size and material information and the cutting sequence number for each part. plates. A list of the nested parts in cut sequence order is also displayed.43 Reports ProNest can produce a variety of reports to assist your cutting machine operator and to provide you with detailed information about production times and costs for your parts and the complete job. and the cutting sequence number for each part. When the report preview window appears. A list of the nested parts in cut sequence order showing the number of torches used and the torch spacing for each part is also displayed.

The priority allows the user to dictate which part should be nested first. priority. It is important to know that ProNest normally will nest the largest part first. along with the optimization strategy (if any) that was used to create it. is a Strategy combo box. restriction angle. Inventory Summary Inventory Detail Optimization Accounts for inventory plates used in the job Provides dimensional information on the inventory plates used. based on its complexity. These can be set as defaults (Settings => Machine => Plasma. and the pierces (blow-through points). quantity required. Since. if desired.(Choose the appropriate process) => Process Parameters) or based on individual material records in conjunction with the appropriate Process Parameter database record (discussed elsewhere in this manual). depending on the options chosen when ProNest was purchased. Rectangular nesting (often called Block nesting) places an imaginary rectangular border around each part. Displays the utilization and production information for each nest in the job. the sooner it will be nested. Will print the part information on standard Avery 5264 labels.44 but without the part picture. the plate(s) can be unnested and another strategy can be selected. under Settings. Each strategy may give different results and take varying amounts of time. Clicking on the ‘+’ by the Importing Parts section under Settings. we will concentrate on True Shape nesting. The lower the number. click on the Start Autonest icon. in general.the strategy chosen will dictate the way ProNest places the parts on the plate. Then it will try the next largest part and so on. they will automatically be placed on the plate. These are discussed in Chapter 3. Factors Which Influence Nesting After developing a list of parts and plates (as discussed earlier in this chapter). True Shape nesting allows parts to be placed on the plate based on their actual shape. These values are applied to all parts . rather than manually placing parts. Part List by Customer Part Label(Avery 5264) HVAC Label(A5164) Automatic Nesting (Optional Feature) Rectangular vs True Shape Automatic Nesting Automatic nesting can be performed in two different styles. then Nesting reveals parameters which affect the rotation angles ProNest tries before placing the parts on the plate and the order (Priority) they are added. etc. Will print labels for HVAC on Avery 5164 labels. The Part List report contains the filenames (including path). Once the parts are nested. This allows parts to be interlocked or placed inside profiles of other parts. Gas. The parts are then placed on the plate in such a way that no part infringes inside the rectangular border of another. initial rotation and reference value for each part in the job. An important aspect of autonesting (as mentioned earlier) is the separations between other parts. If the parts are defined to match the plate material. both styles follow the same procedures and rules. Laser. Autonest. quantity nested. the edge of the plate. and will sort the parts by customer. until either the quantity is exhausted or no more can be fit on the plate. not a rectangular border. starting from the corner specified as the Init Point (defined in the General Settings).

This message also occurs if there are parts remaining and all plates are full. Using Both Automatic and Interactive Nesting A very useful feature of ProNest is the ability to utilize both automatic and interactive nesting on the same job. click All Programs. the order the parts appear in the part bin changes also. autonesting can be used first followed by manual rearranging of parts to enhance the utilization of the plate. Material Database The Material Database stores a list of all the different material types and thicknesses that you might want to eventually nest on. Click on OK. Under the General tab. click New. rotated. click MTC Products. ProNest will not only vary the spacing between parts but also change the number of torches used. Likewise. then the New Nest icon and select a new plate or add another plate from the Add Plates icon. The unit price is used to calculate the part and plate material cost. and then click Material Database. the nest can be saved and/or output as a CNC file. By providing this information. Notes: • • The density and thickness are used to calculate part and plate weight. On the Material Database toolbar. a “Not all parts were nested” message will be displayed. The cut direction can be changed on individual parts. duplicated. which is automatically developed by ProNest. To open the Material Database from the Windows Start menu. 3. click ProNest 8 Nesting System. To add a material to your Material Database 1. click OK. Change the number of torches and try again. Once this list is created. click on the Database menu. Place a few parts on the plate manually in the manner desired then click on the Start Autonest icon to complete the plate. If fixed number of torches and spacing is used and the parts are too large to fit on the plate. based on the space available. ProNest will be able to calculate costs and weights for every part and plate. The part bin is ordered by size (largest part on top). If the optional variable multi-torching features are used. . To save the material. The plate can be cropped and the cutting sequence. To open the Material Database • • To open the Material Database from within the Add Parts window. select Material…. the features discussed earlier in the Interactive Nesting section are all available to the user. it will be available within ProNest and you will be able to assign a material type and thickness for each part and plate. type at least the material name and thickness of the material.45 but ProNest allows the user to modify individual parts by changing the part record field on the Add Parts screen under the Part List bar. Parts can be moved. Multiple Torches As in interactive nesting. 2. multiple torches can be used. When all modifications have been made. If the priority is changed. Once the parts are nested. or mirrored. click Start. The autonest function can be stopped at any time by clicking on the Stop Autonest icon. Set the Number of Torches in the Torches section in Settings to the maximum number of torches (of the same process) used by the cutting machine. can be modified.

To open the Customer Database from the Windows Start menu. and then click Delete on the toolbar. and then click Customer Database. To change customer information in your Customer Database • In the list of customers. Advanced Edit allows the selection of points. 4. By providing this information. click New. locate and double-click the customer you want. The current mode is displayed on the bottom of the screen. Advanced Edit When a part in the Part List is highlighted in the Add Parts window. Customer Database The Customer Database stores a list of all your company’s clients. the Advanced Edit icon becomes visible on the Preview screen. click ProNest 8 Nesting System. Likewise. If editing entities or points is desired. add any information you would like to include. This program allows the user to make significant changes to the selected part. . On the Customer Database toolbar. If the entire profile highlights when selected with the left mouse key. and then change the information as needed. locate and double-click the material you want. click on the Database menu. On the other tab. or profiles. To change material information in your Material Database • In the list of materials. click the one you want to delete. To save the customer. 2. click OK. select Customer…. To open the Customer Database • • To open the Customer Database from within the Add Parts window. To delete a customer from your Customer Database • In the list of customers. and then change the information as needed. 3. type at least the customer name. To add a customer to your Customer Database 1. click the one you want to delete. Advanced Edit is in profile mode. click on Select Profiles to activate profile mode. click All Programs. if only individual entities are being highlighted. click on Select Profiles under the Edit menu to disable profile mode. entities. To delete a material from your Material Database • In the list of materials. it will be available within ProNest and you will be able to assign a customer for each part.46 • The scrap value is used to calculate the nest’s scrap value. ProNest will be able to provide reports itemized by customer. click MTC Products. Under the General tab. Once this list is created. and then click Delete on the toolbar. click Start.

which allow the addition of loops. you will enter Entity mode and the entity you left clicked on will become selected. Right clicking on an entity allows the user to Delete the entity. since it adds to the profile. and center point (if applicable) coordinates. If you click on a part entity outside of the selection tolerance of an intersection point. The scale controls the size of the loop and the remaining parameters refer to CNC output and may or may not be applicable to the cutting machine. Right clicking on an existing lead allows it to be deleted by clicking on Delete LILO or flipped (either from outside the profile to inside or vice versa) by clicking on Flip LILO. using whatever loop values were previously used in this session of Advanced Edit. move to the end of the tab or the leadin to the tab. he would need to choose Select Profiles from the Edit Menu. signified by the + on the part display) and Properties. The properties allow definition of the leadin (if desired). This provides pertinent information about the entity such as start. if moving the leads from corner to corner. then begin cutting again. In other words. Entity Mode Selecting an entity (line or arc) with the left mouse key opens the Entity Properties box to the right of the part display. Looping is a method to ensure a sharp corner on a part. Right clicking on a profile allows the user to Delete it. To the right of the part display. also takes up more material when nested. the kerf offset direction. and CNC output values. then right click to select Quick Tab. When in Point mode. Right clicking on a point allows the user to make it a Start Point or choose Quick Loop. there are most likely problems with the drawing that should be explored. the default leads from ProNest are used in conjunction with the style already used for the part. and output parameters. A left click on a profile opens the Profile Properties box. the torch will shut off. the cut direction. or split the entity at the point he clicked (Split Entity). If you left click on a part entity within the selection tolerance of an intersection point. Tabs can also be added at the point of the mouse click. After adding the tab. left click to select another entity. Selecting Add Tab opens the Tab Properties box on the right of the part display screen. MTC Technical Support will be happy to explain some possible reasons and solutions should this occur. left click on a point (one of the dots on the profile). you will enter Point mode and the intersection point will become selected. . The torch passes straight through and beyond the corner. and the cut sequence number location. However. This prevents rounding of the corner but. make the point where he clicked the start point (Make Start Point). This will create a duplicate tab at the new location. A tab is a bridge or stitch cut that leaves the part still connected to the plate. end. if the leads appear on the wrong side of the profile. the length of the tab. allowing the user to change the cut process. length or radius. Profile Mode If the user has been modifying points and entities and now wants to change features of a profile. If the leads are moved from corner to side (or vice versa). the leads will be set to the ProNest default values. an Intersection Point Properties box appears giving the Coordinates (X and Y distance from the origin.47 Point Mode Point or Entity selection mode is determined by which is selected first. At the spot of the tab. When Make Start Point is selected. then loops around to enter the corner again at a zero degree angle relative to the next line to be cut. the style and dimension will not change.

Select Profiles allows whole profiles to be selected. the output of only a single part is needed and this is a quick way to do it. When the . Area Select (not listed in the Edit menu) fine tunes the Select All function by allowing the user to open a window around the items he wants to select. all the leads would be highlighted and could be modified by changing the properties as we did with a single lead. entities. if an entity is selected prior to opening a window. entities. Additional Selection Techniques In addition to the selection method we used to pick points. The same holds true for profiles. Unselect All will unselect everything. as will clicking off the part. the Edit menu allows other helpful routines: Select All allows mass editing of multiple points. this would not be used since ProNest outputs the code for the entire nest. and profiles. click and hold the left key. Likewise. Release the mouse key and the information will be displayed on the status bar at the bottom of the screen. Reload restores the part to the last saved condition (either the way the part was originally brought in or the way it was after Updating). Delete will remove the selected entity or profile. all the leads should change. eliminating any changes made. Advanced Edit provides a couple other tools. opening a window around a given area. if a lead was selected anywhere on the part and Select All was clicked. When applied. Print allows the part and it’s properties to be printed Edit Menu In addition to those discussed earlier. Default Tab Settings allows the user to set up the tab properties that will be used in Quick Tab mode.48 Additional Utilities of Advanced Edit File Menu When all changes are made to the part. Measure the distance between two points by clicking on the measure icon or menu item. The changes can also be saved when the “x” in the upper right corner is clicked. Select Mode allows you to select points or entities to be modified. If a point is selected. dragging the mouse to the next spot. all entities completely inside the area will be selected. Default Loops Settings allows the user to set up the loop properties that will be used in Quick Loop mode. Sometimes however. all points falling within this window will also become selected. or profiles. Normally. Update saves and carries over the part changes into ProNest upon exiting Advanced Edit. the following options may be useful: Output generates the CNC code that operates the cutting machine. This works in an identical manner to ProNest. For example. Move the crosshairs to one spot.right click then drag the mouse from left to right. allowing them to be edited.

If an item is selected and an item on the other side of the part is clicked with the Shift key. Index traces the path of the torch as it rapid travels (torch off motions) from profile to profile. All the items that are clicked will be selected. not only the two items will be highlighted but all similar items in between. Zoom features are identical to those found in ProNest and were discussed earlier in this chapter. displaying one at a time. View Menu Toolbars may be selected for display and customized. Part Menu Cut Sequence allows the user to change the order that profiles are cut simply by clicking on the profiles in the order he wants. The user may then cycle through each of the visible profiles. displays diamonds at points where ProNest finds problems in the cad drawing. when selected. and other items of interest can be displayed if selected. displays bevel angle information for selected entities in the Entity Properties dialog. . the entity or profile only needs to be partially in the box to be selected. Properties Toolbar will either display the various properties toolbars to the right of the part display or not. dimensions. Using the Ctrl Key Multiple (but similar) items can also be selected by holding the Ctrl key while selecting. when selected. Start Points displays the start point of each profile. Intersection Points show the start and end points of each entity. Cut Sequence assigns a number for each profile in the order the part will be cut. Cut Direction displays arrows pointing the direction the torch will travel around each profile.49 Area Select window is opened from right to left. Using the Shift Key Multiple (but similar) items can also be selected by holding the Shift key while selecting. View All Profiles displays all currently visible profiles in the current part. heat #’s. Bevel Properties. Open Profiles. Part names. The following are some useful features found in the View menu that aid in verifying whether or not the part is ready to nest. View One Profile changes the display mode so that only one visible profile at a time is displayed. Display Only shows any information that is on a cad drawing layer that matches the ProNest Plot layer name.

Cut Simulation allows the user to view a simulation of the geometry of the current part as it would be cut at the cutting machine. A screen appears which allows the user to either save the changes for this part or to update those parts already nested. Entity Menu Split Entity allows the user to split the selected entity. i. then click on OK. Flip Leads will move the LI/LO from the interior portion of the profile to the exterior portion. After clicking on Scale. the appropriate leads will be applied from settings. Edit Cut Paths allows the user to resequence motions in the current CLC part into one or more new profiles.e.0) point to a specified location in reference to the part. Properties The following properties can be modified at the properties window (under Preview) depending on whether a part is selected in the explorer view or the part list. This is an advanced feature which must be authorized. Modify Tabs allows the user to add tabs to selected entities using the default settings. Modify Loops will allow the user to quickly enter loops using the default settings.0) point for the part. See Chapter . Click and drag the mouse (where or how far the mouse is moved makes no difference) and a Scale window appears. This information will be etched or scribed onto the part at the cutting machine. Move Init Pt allows the user to select a new init (0. when selected will change the dimensions of the entire part by a factor defined by the user. The display will not appear different but measuring (Measure from the Tools menu) will indicate the difference. The spot at which the mouse is clicked can become the new init point or X. Split Profile removes the selected entities from the profiles they are currently in and creates 2 or more open profiles. Otherwise. Part Cut Up is an option where ProNest will allow the user to cut parts into smaller pieces and place them at different locations on the same plate or even a different plate. Modify Leads allows the user to change the starting point of the part’s lead-in and leadout. the new start point will assume the original start point properties if the start point is moved into a similar situation. and vice versa. a crosshair appears. 50 will cut it in half). Y coordinate values can be entered. Enter a percentage value for the scale (200 will double the size. Scale. Recalc Init Pt locates the (0. while maintaining the properties previously assigned. Saving Changes When finished with Advanced Edit.This is not designed to correct other types of open profiles like overlapping entities or improperly trimmed intersections).50 Close Open Profiles allows the user to close a gap in the profile (Note. Click on the X to close or select File – Exit. which creates a new point. corner to corner or side to side. Scribe Text will write text onto the part for information purposes. The + sign representing the init point will be moved to that location. Open profiles are indicated between two diamonds.

ProNest searches the CAD drawing for the layer names specified. or click on Return To Nesting. reversing the cut direction. Priority. Options include but aren’t limited to selecting an origin corner. After entering all of the part files for the current job. This is displayed in the reports as well. Note that the Reference is simply a field that can accept alpha/numeric data for your reference. Material. Displays information such as width. a part(s) may be deleted by selecting it (them) and clicking on the remove part icon.All of your cutting. If additional cost information is available. area. number. This reference can be a customer name. Properties such as Quantity. You will be returned to the main screen of ProNest. Cut Sequence settings allow the user to specify the cut sequence method for interior profiles within each part. cut length. CAD Layers . Rotation Restriction. exploding multiple parts and using pre-drawn leads. See Chapter 7 for a complete description of each of these settings. etc. and tolerance. Nesting Section Can be either a part highlighted in the explorer view or part list CAD Import CAD Import Part Must be highlighted in the explorer view. height.51 7 for a complete description of the settings. General identifies the file type. and weight of the selected part. close the Part List window by selecting the Close item from the File menu. When it finds a match. Once added to the part list. as well as specifying settings associated with the particular cut sequence method chosen. .O. and Reference can be changed. it extracts the information and assigns it to the appropriate process. Initial Rotation. The parts now appear in the part bar located at the left of the main ProNest window. click on the X in the upper-right corner of the window. The following chart briefly explains what each category contains. Leads Either View Utilization and Costing Part must be highlighted in part list. All of the lead-in/out information can be viewed and/or modified. a P. scribing and punching processes must be on individual layers in your CAD drawing for ProNest to extract them. time and cost to produce the part will be calculated. file units.

52 .

or skeleton can be selected. select Plate Inventory…. and then click Plate Inventory Database. circular.Width of plate Material . To open the Plate Inventory Database • • To open the Plate Inventory Database from within the Add Plates window.Type of material the plate is made of . click All Programs. On the Plate Inventory Database toolbar. Select the type of plate. click ProNest 8 Nesting System. remnant. Plate Inventory is also the location where the unnested portion of a plate is stored as a remnant or skeleton. To open the Plate Inventory Database from the Windows Start menu.53 Chapter 5: ProNest Options Plate Inventory Database The Plate Inventory Database stores a list of all the plates stored at the facility. click New. Enter in the required fields: The required fields for a Rectangular • • • X Dimension . To add a plate to your Plate Inventory Database 1. click on the Database menu. it can be accessed within ProNest so that a user can easily see what he has available to him to nest on. click MTC Products.Length of plate Y Dimension . click Start. Once this list is created. Rectangular.

If manually entered.54 The required fields for Remnants and Skeletons • • Filename . click OK. To delete a plate from your Plate Inventory Database • In the list of plates. The unit price is used to calculate the plate’s value. weight. Notes: • • The plate’s unit price will be initialized to the material’s unit price.number of times order can be duplicated Click Calculate. total weight.Type of material the plate is made of The required fields for a Circle • • Diameter Material The important fields for each type of plate: • • • • • • Material Date Rotation Angle of the plate Quantity Available for plate Reorder Quantity for plate Reorder Limit . click the one you want to delete. . this field needs to be filled in Material . To change plate information in your Plate Inventory Database • In the list of plates. locate and double-click the plate you want. and then click Delete on the toolbar. To save the plate. value. and then change the information as needed. This will automatically calculate the area. If the plate type is remnant or skeleton the length and width will also be calculated. and total value.

55

Part Inventory Database
The Part Inventory Database stores a list of parts that need to be cut more than once. This list could be used for assemblies or for repeat orders for a customer. Once this list is created, it can be accessed within ProNest when creating your part lists.

To open the Part Inventory Database
• • To open the Part Inventory Database from within the Add Parts window, click on the Database menu, select Part Inventory…. To open the Part Inventory Database from the Windows Start menu, click Start, click All Programs, click MTC Products, click ProNest 8 Nesting System, and then click Part Inventory Database.

To add a part to your Part Inventory Database
1. On the Part Inventory Database toolbar, click New, then select the part(s) from the Import screen. When selected, click on OK. (Note: Multiple selections can be made by using the shift or CTRL key)

56

1. Enter in the required fields: • • • • • • • • • • • Part Name - The name of the part being added to inventory Part Path - Where the part file is located Quantity - Quantity of part required Material - Type of material used Customer - Who the part is being processed for Priority - Order in which part is to be nested Init. Rotation - Initial rotation of the part before nesting Grain Restraint – Rotation restriction value of the part which limits valid orientations for nesting Mirror - Determine whether the part will be mirrored or not Cluster - Determine whether the part will be clustered or not Common Line - Determine whether the part will be common line cut or not

1. Click Calculate. This will automatically calculate the length, width, true area, true weight, rectangular area and rectangular weight. 2. To save the part, click OK.

To delete a part from your Part Inventory Database
• In the list of parts, click the one you want to delete, and then click Delete on the toolbar.

To change part information in your Part Inventory Database
• In the list of parts, locate and double-click the part you want, and then change the information as needed.

57

Custom Remnants
Custom Remnants is an optional feature in ProNest that becomes available when either Part and Plate Inventory or Custom Remnants are enabled.

Creating Custom Remnants
Creating custom remnants can be done in both the New Nest and Autonest setup screens. In each of these screens you have the Remnant option when selecting the custom plate drop-down as shown below.

When you select Remnant under the custom plate drop-down, the Define Remnant button becomes available that will open the Define a Custom Remnant screen you see below.

To create a custom remnant, first click on the Clear All Points button. This will clear the screen leaving only the Cartesian coordinate axis. You have the choice to either use Absolute or Incremental coordinates. Using your preferred coordinate system, click the Add Point button to make 0,0 the start of your remnant. Subsequently change the x and y values to represent your first dimension. After each set of x and y values make sure to

58

click the Add Point button. Repeat these steps, and you will see your remnant in the preview pane as you build it. The Delete Last Point button is available to undo any invalid entries. When your remnant is complete click the OK button and continue on with your nesting.

Assembly Database
The Assembly Database stores a list of assemblies, which contain a list of parts that are needed to create them. Once this list is created, it can be accessed within ProNest when creating your part lists.

To open the Assembly Database
• • To open the Assembly Database from within the Add Parts window, on the Database menu, select Assemblies…. To open the Assembly Database from the Windows Start menu, click Start, click All Programs, click MTC Products, click ProNest 6 Nesting System, and then click Assembly Database.

To add an assembly to your Assembly Database

1. On the Assembly Database toolbar, click New. 2. Type in at least the assembly name. 3. To save the assembly, click OK.

To add parts to your assembly in the Assembly Database
1. Select the assembly on the left column and select Add Parts. 2. Select all the parts that you want to add to the assembly and select Add.

3. Modify the quantities for each part in the assembly by clicking in the quantity field.

59

Notes: • Only inventory parts can be added to an assembly.

To delete an assembly from your Assembly Database
• In the list of assemblies, click the one you want to delete, and then click Delete on the toolbar.

To delete parts from an assembly in your Assembly Database
• In the list of parts for an assembly, click the one you want to delete, and then click Delete on the toolbar.

To change assembly information in your Assembly Database
• • In the list of assemblies, locate and double-click the assembly you want, and then change the information as needed. To change individual parts information in an assembly, first click on the assembly name, then double click on the part record to be changed.

Chain and Bridge Cutting
Chain Cutting
Chain Cutting adds advanced interactive chaining of cut profiles into continuous cutting paths, eliminating costly pierce cycles and improving productivity. The dynamic lead in/out movement makes the process easy and intuitive.

Bridge Cutting
Bridge cutting allows temporary bridges to be created, connecting parts together. Two parallel cutting lines form a “bridge” between two parts. When the torch is following the contour of the first part and gets to the first line of the bridge, it crosses to the second part. The torch will then follow the profile until it gets to either the second line of the original bridge, or the first line of another bridge. There is no limit to the number of bridges that can be created.

It is required for processes such as Oxy-Fuel which are unable to cross a previously cut section of material. If selected. will disable the height control in chain motions. In a “Not-Crossing” lead-in/lead-out. Reverses the direction of the cut if the part leads are on the wrong side. Allows the crossing of a path already cut to link to the next part. in the example shown below) settings window accessed by selecting Settings from the Job pull down menu. Bridge Cutting Settings To view or edit the Bridge Cutting Settings. the leads are angled such that the torch never crosses a previously cut section of the profile. Chain Cutting Part – Chain Separation Disable height control during lead-out Chain Array Lead-In extension Allow cut to cross kerf Chain parts in reverse order Use “NotCrossing” leadin/lead-out The length of a linear extension added to the start of the leadin.60 Chain Cutting Settings To view or edit the Chain Cutting Settings. in the example shown below) settings window accessed by selecting Settings from the File pull down menu. This setting is applied at the time the chains are created. This will only be applied to the 1st lead-in of the chain to allow for a longer cut without affecting the following cuts. . click on the Bridging tab in the cut process (Gas. click on the Chaining tab in the cut process (Gas. Chain separation plus half the part separation provides the distance between the chain and the part.

Adding Profiles to the Current Chain While you are in Chaining mode. and gives the user the option of linking the profiles together so that they are cut with a continuous. Then making sure no parts are still selected. The final chain motion will end at the lead-out of . Begin chaining parts together by selecting (using the left mouse button) the first profile at the location where you wish the lead-in of the chain to be. This toolbar can “float” above your work area. or simply select the next profile. A rubber band line will be drawn from the lead-out of the selected profile to the pointer. enter chaining mode by clicking on the Chaining icon. These selected points (called links) will define the torch path between the two profiles. or be “docked” with your other toolbars. Defines a corner’s maximum angle (in degrees) between two adjoining line/arc entities. Bridge Radius Maximum Corner Angle Preview Tolerance End Point Snap Distance This is a measurement set in screen pixels. ProNest will automatically move the lead-in to that location. non-stop cutting path. Displays a preview of the defined bridge. Radius applied at the intersections of the bridge and part profile. place the parts on the plate that you wish to chain together. Select additional points to define a non-direct path if desired. remembering that the lead-in/out of that profile will be moved to the point where the profile was selected.61 Bridge Cutting Bridge Width Determines the width of the bridge connecting the parts. Using Chain Cutting Chain Cutting is an optional feature of ProNest that is activated by the authorization process. A negative width can be used to “crossover” bridges. A bridge radius is usually used in conjunction with a negative bridge width. the Chaining toolbar will be displayed. To begin chaining parts together. ProNest will exert a magnet-like pull automatically placing the end point at the nearest snap point. When the end point is selected on the plate.

continuous cutting path for multiple parts. click on ‘!’. and so on) or by pressing the Backspace key. Breaking Chains A chain can be deleted (broken) by simply selecting the parts that are chained together. and the lead-out of the last profile. To undo the links. then accept the chain by clicking on the check mark. To complete the chain. or click the right mouse button or press the Esc key to complete a chain. they become a single profile. click on the ‘Back-up’ icon (clicking the icon a second time will back up 2 steps. In applications like Plasma/Laser-Punch machines. The chain retains the lead-in of the first profile. This will remove all chains in the selected parts. click on Close to exit chaining mode. or right click on the part and select Break. This results in reduced production time by elimination of pierce cycles and in consumable costs.62 the second profile selected. After the selected profiles have been chained together. Using Bridge Cutting Bridge cutting can be beneficial in various ways for different cutting processes. This technique is similar to using tabs. Bridge cutting can be used to eliminate pierce cycles for multiple parts without conflicting with drop-table/trap-door operation. Repeat the steps above to add more profiles to the chain. Bridge cutting can be used to develop a single. then click on either the Break icon. For Laser and under-water Plasma cutting where plate movement is not a concern. When finished. . bridging can be employed to effectively stitch-cut long profiles to prevent loss of geometric accuracy caused by plate movement. For dry Oxy-fuel or Plasma cutting. but usually will add fewer pierce cycles than does tabbing. Click on the ‘X’ to cancel the chain and remove it. The start point of the first profile in the chain becomes the start point for the chain.

and allows two or more parts to be cut in such a way that they share at least one common line with each other. When finished. or by right clicking on the parts and selecting Break from the pop-up menu. Common Line Cutting Common Line Cutting is an optional feature of ProNest that is activated by the authorization process. You can add more bridges to the selection using the Ctrl-select method or area select using the right mouse button. by selecting the parts that are bridged together and then clicking on the Break icon. click down with the left mouse button. This will remove all of the bridges in the selected parts. and then click on the bridging icon. To define a bridge. Once selected. they become selected. the Bridging toolbar will appear (the values will be initially grayed out). Click on Close to exit from bridging mode. This reduces the cutting length required and may eliminate pierces for the common cut parts. drag out a line. ProNest will not allow you to enter bridging mode. and release the button. . After bridges are defined. the properties of the bridge (width and radius) are displayed in the toolbar. Breaking Bridges Bridges can be deleted (broken) after they have been accepted. make sure none of the parts are selected. click on the ‘X’. position the mouse. ProNest will then add the bridges at all valid locations. Note: If one or more parts are selected.63 Assigning Bridges To bridge parts together. After clicking on the bridging icon. place the desired parts on the plate. click on the check mark to accept these bridges. to cancel them. You can define multiple bridges by dragging a line across several parts. You can change the properties of the selected bridges by editing the values.

Common Line Cutting Minimum Shared Length Maximum Area Increase (%) Minimum acceptable length of the line to be common cut. in the example shown below) settings window accessed by selecting Settings from the Job pull down menu. If checked. Otherwise. the Kerf Width setting will be used. any lines in any of the parts being CLCed that contain tabs will not be candidates to become a common line. tabbed lines that are used as common lines will have their tabs removed. If this is unchecked. Choose either a Crossing or Not Crossing torch path as required by your application and process.64 Common Line Cut Settings To view or edit the Common Line Cut Settings. If checked. click on the Common Line Cut tab on the cut process (Plasma. If checked. try increasing the value. This is used to determine the proper part separation so the common line does not infringe on either part. However in some cases. Maximum angle a part can be rotated to align the common lines. 100% represents the area taken up by two parts. The width of the torch. the area occupied by the common cut parts may exceed 100% and not accepted for common line cutting. In these cases. A large angle allows greater flexibility for placement of a common cut. Generally. due to part shape or orientation. ProNest will use the kerf value from the Process Parameters. ProNest will use the highest quality value Torch Path Style Maximum Alignment Rotation Kerf Width Use kerf width from process parameters Do not try with lines that have tabs Maintain highest quality . Keep in mind that a larger angle could rotate a part to a position where a side other than the desired one is aligned. Maximum percent of increased area that ProNest will allow the two parts to take up when common line cut.

Hold the shift key and select both parts so they are both highlighted. moving the part the distance of the line and the kerf. The common lined part can now be added to the part bin by clicking on the cluster icon. ProNest will compensate for the common line and allow for the width of the kerf. or click on Common Line Cut from the Part pull down menu. Breaking Common Lines A common line cut can be deleted (broken) by simply selecting the parts that are sharing the common line.65 on common lines present on either line that becomes the common line. This will remove the common line cut status. This is a measurement set in screen pixels. so at least one of the parts needs to be repositioned or deleted. or right click on the part and select Break from the pop-up menu. With the part in the selected state. Two parts (they don’t have to be the same) can also be positioned on the plate with the edges to be common cut facing each other. and they will join at a common line entity. Tolerance (In screen pixels) End Point Snap Distance Using Common Line Cutting Common Line Cutting is applied to parts already on the nest. ProNest will exert a magnet-like pull automatically placing the end point at the nearest snap point. . Quad CLC (Common Line Cut) Quad CLC is an optional feature in ProNest that is activated through the authorization of Common Line Cutting and allows 4 of the same part to be common line cut together. but the parts will be in conflict. When the end point is selected on the plate. then click on the Common Line Cut icon. then click on either the Break icon. the lowest valid quality value of either line is used. If unchecked. If checked. click on the Common Line Cut icon.

66

Creating Quad CLC Parts
When you have a part that you want to Quad CLC, you first need to make sure that the Mirror value is set to Either, as shown below, when you add your part to the part list.

Enter a quantity for the part this is 4 or greater, and then click Return to Nesting. Nest one of those parts on the plate, and make sure that it is selected. (has handles on it).

Click on the Quad CLC icon and it will create the Quad CLC group. If desired you can then click on Cluster to add the custom part to your Part List.

67

Common Line Cut Array
CLC Array is an optional feature in ProNest that is activated through the authorization process and will array and create common line parts at the same time. This will reduce your scrap and cut time, while preserving consumables.

Creating a CLC Array
Add a part to your part list that you would like to CLC Array. Make sure to set you quantity before clicking on Return to Nesting.

68

Manually nest one of that part on the plate, and make sure that it is selected. (has handles on it). This part should be located in the corner of your plate that is your initialization point. When all of this is complete you can click on the CLC Array icon, or right click on the part and choose CLC Array from the list, and you will see the results.

All forms of CLC will prekerf your parts according to the value set in your Common Line Cut settings page. You may also use the checkbox so that ProNest uses the kerf from your Process Parameters.

Common Line Cut Array Settings
To view or edit the Common Line Cut Array settings, click on the ‘+’ sign next to the Common Line Cut tab on the cut process (Plasma, in the example shown below) settings window accessed by selecting Settings from the Job pull down menu.

69

CLC Array Settings
Torch path style Insert Stop Codes Kerf crossing lead-outs Choose either a Crossing or Not Crossing torch path as required by your application and process. If using a Not Crossing torch path, select this option to output a stop code at the end of each part in the array. If using a Not Crossing torch path, select this option to allow leadouts on the CLC array to cross previously cut motions. Unselecting this will limit the number of leadouts that will be applied to the array.

Array Size Limitations Maximum number of units The largest number of base units that will be used to create a CLC array. A base unit is the smallest grouping of parts that may easily be combined into a symmetrical CLCed group. For example, the base unit of a right triangle contains 2 parts CLCed along the hypotenuse, but the base unit for a rectangle contains only one part. The largest number of rows of base units that will be used in the completed array. The largest number of columns of base units that will be used in the completed array. The maximum width, in linear units, of the completed array. The maximum height, in linear units, of the completed array. Check this box to force the completed CLC array to use full columns. Unchecking this box allows the last column in the CLC array to have fewer parts than the rest of the columns in the array.

Maximum rows Maximum columns Maximum width Maximum height Full columns only

Multi Part Common Line Cut
Multi-part Common Line Cut is an optional feature which enables common line cutting with any number of parts or with the plate edge. It introduces many new features into ProNest, including geometric drag, geometric bump, safety cuts, and torch path edit in Advanced Edit. Geometric drag and geometric bump are used to position parts with other parts or with the plate edge. In addition if CLC is not available, geometric bump can place parts a single kerf width from other parts or directly at the plate edge. Safety cuts are used to avoid piercing too close to a previously cut part. Safety cuts can be applied to all intersection points between CLC profiles and to the profile start or end. Torch path edit in Advanced Edit will allow torch paths to be defined for any CLC parts in the part list or the nest.

70

Three steps must be completed to create a multi-part CLC part. Two or more nest parts must be aligned on common lines to create a CLC cluster. This is accomplished through geometric drag and geometric bump. The working CLC cluster must be selected. The selected working CLC cluster must be common line cut into a multi-part CLC part.

Aligning Parts
Geometric drag and geometric bump are used to align parts on the common line or with the plate edge. In addition, geometric bump may be used to place parts a single kerf width away from other parts or directly at the plate edge if common line cut is not available.

Geometric Drag
Geometric drag is a way to “snap” the motions of different parts together. It prepares parts for multi-part CLC by precisely moving a part into position relative to one or more other parts. Left click and hold the left mouse button on the intended common line of the part to geometric drag it. The cursor changes and the common line is bolded to indicate the part is geometric dragged instead of just moved.

Drag the selected part to the common line edge of another part. Hold it there until the parts snap together. The parts will be shaded with orange diagonal lines when they are properly aligned to create a working CLC cluster. Tip: If a rectangle is geometrically dragged into a corner, it will snap the rectangle into the corner to share two common lines. Tip: Only line motions of exterior cut profiles may be selected for geometric drag. If a motion is not selectable for geometric drag, ordinary dragging will occur instead.

Geometric Bump
Geometric bump allows a part to be bumped to a working CLC cluster, another part or the plate edge. Geometric bump can only be done in four directions: up, down, right and left. Select the part to geometric bump, hold down the Ctrl key, and press the desired arrow key or click the desired bump handle. The bump handle is the white square in the center of each side of a selected part. When the Ctrl key is pressed and the cursor is over a bump handle, the cursor changes to a black arrow indicating a geometric bump will occur.

down. as long as they can all move in the same direction. it is still part of the working CLC cluster and it may be further aligned using geometric bump or drag Parts in a working CLC cluster retain their tabs. right or left. If a part in a working CLC cluster is selected. Tip: If a rectangle is geometrically bumped into a corner. it will snap the rectangle into the corner to share two common lines. Just like the geometric dragging. A working CLC cluster is designated by orange diagonal lines across the parts. the parts will be shaded with orange diagonal lines when they are properly aligned in a working CLC cluster. Selecting a Working CLC Cluster A working CLC cluster is selected in one of three ways: 1) Select the working CLC cluster by selecting each part in the working CLC cluster. geometric bump along a common line will move the selected parts along a common line at any angle. Working CLC Clusters Working CLC clusters are created by combining multiple parts along common lines using geometric drag and geometric bump. A working CLC cluster remains defined as long as at least two parts are still part of it or until it is transformed into a multi-part CLC cluster. This menu option only appears if the part belongs to a working CLC cluster. A part is added to an existing working CLC cluster when it is geometric dragged or bumped to a common line in an existing working CLC cluster. Geometric Bump Along a Common Line Geometric bump along a common line allows one or more selected parts that belong to a working CLC cluster to be repositioned along their common lines. 2) Select the working CLC cluster by clicking the mouse on any part in the working CLC cluster and choosing Select entire working CLC cluster from the menu. Tip: Geometric bump ignores leads. It is usually used to slide one part to the end of the motion that it shares with another part. . This is done by selecting parts along a common line that belong to a working CLC cluster. and pressing the desired arrow key or handle. loops and tabs. holding down the Ctrl key. 3) Double clicking the mouse on any part in the working CLC cluster Adding a Part to a Working CLC Cluster A new working CLC cluster is created when a part is geometric dragged or bumped to another part.71 The part will automatically bump in the desired direction to one kerf distance from the nearest part or zero separation from the plate edge. While geometric bump will move the selected parts up. leads and transition loops but they are ignored during geometric drag and bump operations. This allows multiple parts to be clustered together along common lines.

72 Removing a Part From a Working CLC Cluster When one or more parts in a working CLC cluster are selected. interior. Once created. and open profiles can not be common line cut. If only one part remains in the original working CLC cluster. If a selected working CLC cluster part is moved or deleted it is removed from the working CLC cluster. If the cut processes are different neither geometric bump nor geometric drag will allow the parts to be positioned for CLC. Multi-Part CLC Parts Multi-part CLC parts will consist of two or more parts that share common lines. Arcs. the other parts remain unselected to allow removal and alignment of parts in the working CLC cluster. the working CLC cluster is broken into two or more separate working CLC clusters. the selected Multi-part CLC part may look similar to the 6 part multi-part CLC part pictured to the right. and breaking. This is because of strict cutting requirements when beveling and because most of the instructions for the bevel head appear in leads and transition loops. the part is removed from that working CLC cluster and the working CLC cluster is destroyed. which may not be maintained when parts are CLC. they are treated the same as chained and bridged parts for reports. . a multi-part CLC part is created by choosing Common line cut in the menu or clicking on the common line cut icon. Breaking the Working CLC Cluster A working CLC cluster may be broken by selecting the entire working CLC cluster and choosing the break option from the menu or hitting the break icon on the toolbar. The removed part no longer has the diagonal red stripes across it indicating it is no longer a part of the working CLC cluster. For two entities to be CLC together. all parts are removed from it. Once created. Creating a Multi-part CLC Part From a Selected Working CLC Cluster After a working CLC cluster is selected. Restrictions on Working CLC Clusters Parts with beveled exterior profiles may not be added to a working CLC cluster. If parts that have lines in common in a working CLC cluster are selected and removed from the working CLC cluster. they must have the same cut process. costing. When a working CLC cluster is broken.

CLC array. the multi-part CLC parts do not automatically compensate for this change. Tabs may not be added to common lines but they will remain on motions that are not common line cut. The part will turn red in error if the kerf values have changed since the multi-part CLC part was created. Other leads. and recreate the multi-part CLC part. or multi-part CLC can have safety cuts added. When a multi-part CLC part is broken. Because the CLC parts are pre-kerfed. Pre-kerfing At the time multi-part CLC parts are created the exterior profile is pre-kerfed based on the kerf values in the job or XLS settings. break the common line cut part. An intersection is anywhere along a profile where three or more entities intersect. Tip: To compensate for kerf value changes. Safety cuts result in the partial cutting of some portion of an entity. select the multi-part CLC part. Leads are automatically added based on either default leads settings or leads XLS table settings. . In most cases quad CLC. rebuild the working CLC cluster. The parts can be manipulated as described under the Working CLC cluster section above. Safety cuts are applied at all intersection points that involve more than one torch path between CLC profiles and can be applied where subsequent profiles start or end. Leads may be modified or moved if they are on closed profiles. tabs and transition loops are automatically removed from all common lines or common plate edges. it becomes a working CLC cluster whose parts may be adjusted or removed. and Transition Loops When a multi-part CLC part is created from a working CLC cluster. and transition loops may be removed or modified as necessary. leads. Pair CLC parts can not have safety cuts unless certain options are checked in the settings. tabs. the exterior profile kerf codes are removed from the output CNC code for these parts. quad and array) may be broken into working CLC clusters. Interior profiles will not be pre-kerfed If the kerf value is changed in the job or XLS settings. They are applied to common line parts that have multiple exterior profiles common line cut into multiple common line profiles.73 Breaking the Multi-part CLC Parts A multi-part CLC part may be broken by selecting the cluster and choosing the break option from the menu or hitting the break icon on the toolbar. Leads. break the working CLC cluster. All CLC parts (pair. The multi-part CLC part will now be pre-kerfed using the new kerf values Safety Cuts Safety cuts are a method used to avoid piercing too close to a previous common line cut part. Tabs.

or outputting CNC code. reignite. When this is checked the Offset for process-on is activated. The End of Profiles tab contains two fields: Add safety cuts to the end of profiles and Offset for process-off. Safety cuts are generated through the job settings. Check the Add safety cuts to the end of profiles checkbox if safety cuts should be applied to profiles that end at . the torch will cut from its current position at the intersection out along the safety cut. Check the Add safety cuts to the beginning of profiles checkbox if safety cuts should be applied to profiles that start at the current profile. The torch will re-pierce and cut along the next safety cut. unchecked by default. and End of Profiles. This is The process parameters XLS will be used if the Use values from Process Parameters (*. The Offset for process-on should contain the distance beyond the end of the safety cut to start cutting when safety cuts are applied to the start of the profile. They are added based on the current settings while running reports. The Length of safety cuts should contain the maximum value for the length of the safety cuts.xls) checkbox is checked. The Begin of Profiles tab contains two fields: Add safety cuts to the beginning of profiles and Offset for process-on. On the Safety Cut Settings page there are 3 tabs: General. Tip: Pair CLC parts can not have safety cuts unless the Add safety cuts at all intersections option is checked in the settings. Begin of Profiles. The General tab contains two fields: Length of safety cuts and Add safety cuts at all intersections checkbox. cut simulation. Check the Add safety cuts at all intersections checkbox if safety cuts should be applied anywhere that a profile meets or crosses itself at an intersection. Safety Cut Settings Safety cuts do not exist in the normal course of processing in ProNest. See the Safety Cut Settings Using the Process Parameters XLS section below for information on setting up the Process parameters XLS file for safety cuts. The settings are located under common line cut for each cut process in your machine. This will continue until all safety cuts required at that intersection point have been cut. Then the torch will move back to the intersection. Tip: If the Length of safety cuts value is zero no safety cuts will be applied. and continue cutting the profile. Safety cuts will not be visible at any time other than cut simulation in either Advanced Edit or ProNest. turn off and return to the intersection. The torch will be turned off and moved back to the intersection.74 Torch Behavior During Safety Cuts When a safety cut is added to a profile. Open the job settings by clicking on Job then Settings in the menu or by clicking on the settings icon in the toolbar. The Use safety cuts checkbox needs to be checked to use safety cuts.

750 2. If the process parameters file is set up properly.25 -0.00 1.xls) checkbox needs to be checked to use the Process Parameters XLS. A zero value will cause the process-on and processoff location to be the same point as the end of the safety cuts.750 0.00 1. the values from the job settings will be used.25 1.12 0.00 1.50 0.75 1.00 1.250 0.12 0.00 1. A positive process-on and process-off value will cause the pierce location and torch off location to occur along the portion of the profile that has not been precut as part of a safety cut.00 1.25 0 0 0 0 -0.75 1.00 1. A negative value will cause the process-on and process-off location to appear at some point within the safety cut.375 0.25 0.50 0.50 0.25 0.50 0.25 -0.75 0.12 0.12 0.12 0. Start Safety Cut Offset.25 0.00 1.12 0. These checkboxes are unchecked by default.75 1.500 1.50 0.25 -0.25 0. and End Safety Cut Offset. Safety Cut Settings Using the Process Parameters XLS To use the process parameters XLS file for the safety cut settings the file needs to be valid.25 0.50 0.500 0.50 0.50 0. If an offset is greater than the safety cut.12 0.00 Safety Cut Length * 0.00 Pierce Sep 0.50 0 Start Safety Cut Offset* 0. It is possible that a very small profile could be created in between two safety cuts and it is not always desirable to make such a small cut.12 0.25 0.00 1.00 1. the process-on will occur at the start of the safety cut or the process-off will occur at the end of the safety cut.000 1.00 1.75 0.25 0 Material MS MS MS MS MS MS MS MS MS MS MS Kerf 0. The Use safety cuts checkbox needs to be checked to use safety cuts.50 0.25 0. When this is checked the Offset for process-off is activated.75 0.25 0 End Safety Cut Offset* 0.75 0.75 the current profile.00 1.00 1.00 Plate Sep 0.000 Feed rate 160 100 80 70 55 45 35 22 15 10 7 Part Sep 0.00 1. The offset length is limited by the length of the safety cut. and to contain three new columns: Safety Cut Length. Tip: If the process parameters XLS file is not properly set up.75 0.50 0.75 1. then some checkboxes in the job setting need to be checked.12 .875 1.25 0. Setting up the Process Parameters XLS File Sample process parameter file values are in the table below: inch Thickne ss 0.00 1.250 1. to contain valid material and thickness values.625 0. The Offset for process-off should contain the distance before the end of the safety cut to stop cutting when safety cuts are applied to the end of the profile.12 0. The Use values from Process Parameters (*.25 0 0 0 0 -0.50 0.12 0. The Advanced tab allows you to specify the minimum profile length to retain in the part.

the same material and thickness should all have the same safety cut values. Selecting Torch Paths There are three ways to select torch paths: a single torch path. This will display the automatically generated torch paths that can be modified. The safety cut information gets applied based on the material and thickness values. or all torch paths. Each different material and thickness can have different safety cut values. The torch paths do not need to be selected for this delete option. and End Safety Cut Offset) need to be added to the process parameter XLS file. icon in the torch path All the torch paths can be deleted by clicking on the delete all editing toolbar. Tip: The same icon is used for the delete all icon in the torch path editing toolbar and the delete in the menus for deleting selected torch paths. When a torch path is deleted it turns from bold black (or blue) arrow lines to regular black lines with no arrows. All the torch paths can be selected automatically by clicking Edit then Select All in the Advanced Edit menu. Tip: If profile types or profile areas are used in the process parameters XLS. . Multiple torch paths are selected by holding down the Shift key and clicking on part of multiple torch paths. Torch path editing can be accessed through Part then Edit Torch Paths in the Advanced Edit menu or by clicking on the Edit Torch Paths icon in the toolbar. When a path is selected it will turn from black to blue in color. Click on Edit then Delete from the main menu. Torch path editing Torch path edit in Advanced Edit will allow torch paths to be defined for CLC parts. Start Safety Cut Offset. Right click on the selected torch paths and select Delete from the menu. A single torch path is selected by clicking on part of a torch path. multiple torch paths. There are three ways to delete selected torch paths: Press the Delete key on the keyboard. Deleting Torch Paths There are two ways to delete torch paths: deleting selected torch paths or all torch paths. The three new columns (Safety Cut Length.76 * The safety cut values shown are examples only and are not necessarily the best values for your machine or materials.

Enabled only when the direction is established and the torch path is not terminated at an intersection. Next Motion . . click the beginning of the new torch path. ProNest will advance the torch path forward until it hits an intersection that contains two or more choices that are not yet a part of a torch path. Torch Path Editing Tools There are several tools on the torch path editing toolbar that can come in handy when editing the torch path. Two or more directional arrows will appear at each intersection until the torch path is complete. the torch path is deleted. This can usually happen only after clicking the previous motion button.Backs up the torch path to the previous intersection. Previous motion can backup until the torch path is deleted. This button is only enabled when the direction is established and the torch path is not terminated at an intersection. it will show the beginning point and the torch path to the next intersection point.Advances the torch path forward until the next intersection that Next Decision Point has two or more choices. After a torch path direction is selected. there is no active intersection after this kind of back up. If the mouse is hovered over one of the directional arrows. Previous Motion . If Previous Decision Point there is no previous intersection.77 Defining a Torch Path The first step to defining a torch path is to delete the existing path.Backs up the torch path one motion. This can usually happen only after clicking the previous motion button. When a torch path is completed. . Many times.Advances the torch path forward one motion. Directional arrows will appear on the part and in the torch path editing window. Traversing the Edit Torch Path The large and small directional arrows in the edit torch path toolbar allow the torch path to be traversed by either a decision point or a motion. . it remains active until another action is taken. Once done. Click on one of the directional arrows on the part or in the torch path editing window to choose a torch path direction.

For plate edge CLCing. Calculate Torch Path Calculate Torch Path .78 Reverse Cut Direction Reverse Cut Direction . This means that one or more motions in the part that line up with the plate edge will not be cut.The torch path arrows change direction and the active intersection (if any) changes. If this is clicked before any torch paths are generated then it will calculate the torch paths for all the common line cuts. If this button is clicked after several torch paths have been created. The default is to have no preference for cutting direction. the parts are positioned using geometric bumping and geometric dragging as previously described. A value of zero means the cutting will start right on the plate edge. Plate Edge Common Line Cut Multi part CLC can also allow you to cut a part in common with the plate edge. Plate Edge Common Line Cut Settings Allow common lines with the plate edge Extension Check this to allow parts to be common line cut with the plate edge. Distance to extend beyond or start within the plate edge. Cut direction . This extension value is applied at output time. This setting allows profiles that start or end at the plate edge to be cut toward the plate edge or away from the plate edge. it will fill in the torch path for the rest of the cuts.Calculates the torch path for any remaining cuts.

To view or edit collision avoidance settings. This is accomplished through a combination of moving lead in/out positions. and of course. This will activate the collision avoidance settings for that particular torch path. Each torch path can be modified by clicking on the path line. User defined settings allow ProNest to automatically apply this technology to your nests. The blue line represents the torch path. Note: Additional modification to the nest will most likely cause ProNest to recalculate the cut sequence and collision avoidance paths. the user can determine whether he wants the torch to travel the selected path fully or partially raised. and by using partial or full torch raises.79 Collision Avoidance Collision Avoidance is an optional feature that helps eliminate the chance of torch . Click ok then create a nest as shown in the following screen. To reconfigure the torch path altogether. Refer to Chapter 7 for a complete description of these settings. developing avoidance paths around possible tip-up situations. Place a check in the top box to “enable collision avoidance”. At this point. you have full interactive editing capability. a solid line indicates a full torch raise. Skeleton Cut Up Skeleton Cut Up is an optional feature that will cut the left over plate into smaller pieces. Collision avoidance should be one of the last operations performed prior to saving the job and creating the CNC output.part collisions and can significantly reduce production time. click on the Collision Avoidance tab under Settings from Job. resequencing interior profiles. and dragging it to the desired position. then choose Skeleton Cut Up to display the settings on the right of the screen. click on the Collision Avoidance Mode icon. Place a check in the box to activate Skeleton Cut Up. click on the ‘Calculate New Paths’ icon. . making it easier to remove the scrap material from the shop floor. Click on Settings from the Job pull down menu. and a dotted line indicates a partial torch raise. or travel a direct path – all by choosing the appropriate icon. To display the torch path with Collision Avoidance activated.

Similarly. The basic method uses the fewest options and is fastest. Refer to Chapter 7 for a complete description of these settings. To view. moving away from Plate Initialization Point defined in your settings. but rather is a special array operation that is accessed by clicking on the Pattern Array icon on the tool bar. click on Nest in the main menu and then click on the right arrow next to the Pattern Array menu item and select the desired method from the submenu. To remove individual lines. intermediate and advanced. Each grid can be modified by clicking either the horizontal or vertical lines and dragging them to the desired position or by clicking on the ‘Calculate new lines’ icon and changing the previously determined properties. With Pattern Array nesting. To remove the cut grid. additional lines can be added by clicking on the Add Horizontal Line or Add Vertical Line respectively. Pattern Array nesting develops this pattern by looking at a region of the plate starting at the location of the currently selected part and then the plate area. rightclick popup menu. drag them off the plate. . ProNest automatically determines the spacing and orientation of the selected part(s) to maximize the number of that part that can be placed in the available plate area. There are three different methods for Pattern Array nesting: basic.80 Click on the Skeleton Cut Up mode icon to display the grid that ProNest will follow to cut the material into smaller pieces. or by selecting the Pattern Array item from the Nest menu while a part or group of parts is selected. These methods control how many different options ProNest evaluates while determining the best pattern. click on the Clear icon. and/or change the current ProNest Pattern Array method. Pattern Array The Pattern Array feature is not accessed from AutoNesting. while advanced uses the most options and takes more time.

In the Preview window. click on the Edit Part List icon in the main ProNest screen. . this will place the part in the preview window and activate Advanced Edit. click on the Advanced Edit icon. To begin using Part Cut Up. Click on the desired part in the part list at the bottom of the screen.81 Part Cut Up Part Cut Up is an optional feature where ProNest will allow the user to cut parts into smaller pieces and place them at different locations on the same plate or even a different plate.

Each of these new ‘parts’ will be displayed individually in the Advanced Edit window.82 Click on Part Cut Up from the Part pull down menu. or click on the Calculate New Lines icon to change spacings between lines. . With the cut lines in the desired position. To modify these cuts. The grid lines show where the part is going to be cut. close the part cut up window and accept the part cut up lines. Click on the right arrow to scroll through the new parts. The part will be cut into smaller parts. Close the Advanced Edit window to add these parts to the part list. either click on the cut lines you wish to move and drag them to the desired location. The following screen shows lines that have been manually moved.

the icon will be grayed out and the hint will be “Can’t Redo”. Export Part List Output CNC Reports Preferences… Exit Edit Menu Undo Move While a part or group of parts is selected.83 Chapter 6: Menu and Toolbar Reference Menu Reference File Menu New Job… Open Job… Save Job Save Job As… Import Part List Creates a new (empty) job Opens a previously saved job Saves the current job with the current job name Saves the current job with a new name or into a different folder Imports a PNL (Part Nest List) file which contains part and plate information. If there are no moves that can be undone. the icon will be grayed out and the hint will be “Can’t Undo”. click on this icon to “undo” the previous movement or change in orientation. Displays the Output CNC dialog used to specify the name and folder used to output the CNC files for each nest in the job Click on the Report item to display a submenu with the ProNest reports. While a part or group of parts is selected. Closes the program. If there are no moves that can be redone. Click on the desired report to preview and/or print that report. click on this icon to “redo” the previous movement or change in orientation. Selects all parts on the current nest Unselects (nests) all selected parts Deletes all selected parts Switches to Part Selection mode Switches to Measurement mode Switches to Modify Leads mode Redo Move Select All Unselect All Delete Select Mode Measure Mode Modify Leads . Allows the current NIF file to be saved as a PNL (Part Nest List) file. this data becomes immediately available. After importing. Displays the ProNest Preferences dialog window. The individual reports are described in a previous chapter.

When checked. Click on any of the toolbar items (Edit. You can also customize your toolbars and menus by clicking on the Customize… option. Used to zoom in on a selected. When checked. Reverts to the previous zoom level. A skeleton (the entire plate less the cut parts) can also be created. Allows the user to view or edit the current ProNest settings Allows the user to change to a different machine for the current job. Either a remnant. or both can be saved to plate inventory for future use in nesting. Location.84 View Menu Toolbars Clicking on the Toolbars item displays a submenu containing a list of the possible toolbars that can be displayed. a skeleton. this option will cause ProNest to draw a small solid circle at the pierce point of each cutting profile. this displays rulers vertically on the left and horizontally on the bottom of the plate. When checked. rectangular region of the nest. and Nest) to check (display). This displays (when checked) or hides (when unchecked) the Color Legend. Returns to a view of the entire plate. Edit Plate List Settings Change Machine Create Remnants and Skeletons . The color legend allows the user to display different processes and features on the nest in different colors. Used to zoom in on the region of the selected parts on the plate. Status Bar. but not cut. or uncheck (hide) a toolbar. this option will cause ProNest to draw a small square at both ends of an open (non-closed) cutting profile. Part List Color Legend Rulers Area Zoom Zoom Selected Zoom Out No Zoom Cut Direction Pierces Open Profiles Display Only Job Menu Edit Part List Displays the Part List Editor which allows the user to add parts to the job part list or change the properties of existing parts Displays the Plate List Editor which allows the user to add plates to the job plate list or change the properties of existing plates. This displays (when checked) or hides (when unchecked) the Part Toolbar with the list of parts available to be nested for the current job. Will create a remnant (drop) if the nested plate is cropped. part names or dimensions can be added for viewing purposes. this option will cause ProNest to draw a small arrow at the mid point of each line and arc of each cutting profile indicating the cutting direction. This is information for display purposes only and does not get sent to the cutting machine. Navigation. For example. When checked. Standard.

optimized nesting is run. Deletes the current nest. Removes the crop from the current nest. Allows the user to cut the current nest a specified number of times. This option must be enabled in the ProNest Settings. Automatically crops the nest using the settings on the Crop settings page. ProNest will output code to cut up the skeleton before or after the nest is cut at the machine based on which option is selected. including the Skeleton Cutup Cut Simulation Crop Auto Crop Delete Crop AutoCrop All Delete All Crops Start AutoNest… Optimize Array Pattern Array Chain Array CLC Array Cut Number of Times… Nest Properties… . Displays the Autonest dialog window used to specify the options for ProNest autonesting. Determines the spacing and number of the selected part or group that can be placed in a rectangular grid arrangement and then automatically arrays the parts. Nest Menu New Nest… Background Image Delete Nest Delete All Nests Cut Sequence Collision Avoidance Displays the New Nest dialog window. When the user clicks OK on this screen. Displays the Optimize dialog which allows the user to choose the nesting strategies to use to nest the parts in an optimized fashion. the parts will be chain cut according to the previously determined ProNest settings. Creates a rectangular grid of parts common line cut with each other. including spacing and orientation and then automatically arrays the parts. When this is selected. Allows the user to import a JPG or BMP file to use as a background image on the nest. description and summary information for the current job. Displays the properties of the current nest. Helps eliminate the chance of torch collisions and can significantly reduce production time. Deletes all nests in the job Used to view or change the cut sequence for the current nest. This option must be enabled in the ProNest Settings. Will automatically crop all plates in the nest. Used to interactively define a crop cut on the nest to remove unused material from the skeleton created by cutting the parts. used to add a new. Deletes the crop from all of the nested plates. Used to view the path the machine takes as it performs its operations for the current nest. Uses advanced techniques to calculate an optimal pattern of the selected part or group.85 Job Information Displays a dialog window showing the path. empty plate on which to nest parts.

Will put ProNest in bridging mode (see Chapter 6 for more details). Removes the tabs from the selected parts. Bumps the selected part(s) down on the plate to the Uncluster Select entire working CLC cluster Common Line Cut Common Line Cut (Quad) Chain Bridge Break Mirror Duplicate Reverse Cut Direction Automatic Move Leads Edge Pierce Remove Edge Pierces Auto Tabs Remove Tabs Rotate to Next 90 Rotate Long Side Increment Angle Decrement Angle Bump Up Bump Down . Nests the selected part or group and then places a copy of it placed slightly offset from the original in the selected state. Bumps the selected part(s) up on the plate to the specified separation from other parts or the plate edge. Will put ProNest in chaining mode (see Chapter 6 for more details). and production time. Mirrors the selected part or group of parts about the vertical axis running through the center of the selected group region. When this is selected. number of times it will be cut. allowing the parts to be treated individually. Will common line cut four of the same part. utilizations as well as estimates of production and material cost. This will determine the selected part’s longest straight side and proceed to rotate that side to the next closest counterclockwise horizontal or vertical position. Will take the existing lead-in of each selected part and connect it to the edge of the plate. Will break any selected chained. Selects the entire working CLC cluster(s) to which the selected part(s) belong Will common line cut the selected parts.86 plate size. Will remove the edge pierces. ProNest will automatically move the leads of the selected parts to the specified location. or common lined part. bridged. This rotates the selected part or group of parts to the next 90 degrees from its initial angle. Rotates the part or group of parts counter-clockwise by the increment angle. Rotates the part or group of parts clockwise by the increment angle. Ungroups the selected cluster of parts. Part Menu Cluster Groups the selected parts together so that they can be treated as a single unit and adds that cluster to the part toolbar. Will automatically add tabs to the selected parts based on the AutoTab settings. Reverses the direction in which the part is will be cut.

allowing the parts to be treated individually. Toolbars Reference Clicking on the Toolbars item in the View menu will display a sub-menu with all of the possible ProNest Toolbars. Groups the selected parts together so that they can be single unit and adds that cluster to the part toolbar. Will break any selected chained. While a part or group of parts is selected. click on this icon to “undo” the previous movement or change in orientation. right or left edges of the ProNest screen. These toolbars can be docked at the top. Will common line cut a selected part. Bump Left Bump Right Bumps the selected part(s) left on the plate to the specified separation from other parts or the plate edge. or common lined part. Will put ProNest in bridging mode. Ungroups the selected cluster of parts. Bumps the selected part(s) right on the plate to the specified separation from other parts or the plate edge. click on this icon to “redo” the previous movement or change in orientation. • Edit Undo Move While a part or group of parts is selected.87 specified separation from other parts or the plate edge. You can toggle the checkmark by clicking on any item in the sub-menu. Will common line cut four of the same part. Will put ProNest in chaining mode. bridged. bottom. If there are no moves that can be redone. This mode allows you to select new locations for the lead in/out positions for your part just by clicking on a new location. If there are no moves that can be undone. A link to the MTC web site A link to the Pronest page on the MTC site Displays the About ProNest dialog window with current license information and buttons used to update or transfer the current ProNest license. the icon will be grayed out and the hint will be “Can’t Undo”. or can also be “floating” toolbar windows. Those toolbars with a check before the name will be displayed on the ProNest desktop. Redo Move Cluster Uncluster Modify Leads Common Line Cut Common Line Cut (Quad) Chain Bridge Break . the icon will be grayed out and the hint will be “Can’t Redo”. Help Menu ProNest Help… MTC Home Page Pronest Home Page About… Accesses the help file for ProNest.

Displays the current view scale factor in pixels per inch or View Scale: . Will remove the selected tabs. Will take the existing lead-in and connect it to the end of the plate. This displays the dimensions of the current plate. Nests the selected part or group and then places a copy placed slightly offset from the original in the selected state. Reverses the direction in which the part is will be cut. Rotates the part or group of parts clockwise by the increment angle. Allows the user to go to the next nested plate. Allows the user to go to the last nested plate. Rotates the part or group of parts counter-clockwise by the increment angle. Will automatically add a tab to the selected entity. Will remove the edge pierces. This rotates the selected part or group of parts to the next 90 degrees from its initial angle.88 Mirror Mirrors the selected part or group of parts about the vertical axis running through the center of the selected group region. The Y value of the current mouse position. Displays the number of torches being used in the current nest. Duplicate Reverse Cut Direction Automatic Move Leads Edge Pierce Remove Edge Pierce Auto Tab Remove Tabs Number of Torches Torch Spacing Rotate to Next 90 Rotate Long Side Incremental Angle Decremental Angle • Navigation First Previous Current Nest Sheet Next Last Previous Work Zone Next Work Zone Size Material Allows the user to go to the first nested plate. Allows the user to make the next work zone active. This will determine the selected part’s longest straight side and proceed to rotate that side to the next closes counterclockwise horizontal or vertical position. This displays the material of the current plate. ProNest will automatically move the leads of the selected parts to the specified location. • X: Y: Location The X value of the current mouse position. Displays the number of the current nest and the number of times it is cut. Shows the distance between the torches. Allows the user to go to the previously nested plate. Allows the user to make the previous work zone active. When this is selected.

89 pixels per mm. Distance: DX: This field is used to display the distance represented by the line drawn while in measurement mode. This field is used to display the delta Y (change in Y position) represented by the line drawn while in measurement mode. This field is used to display the delta X (change in X position) represented by the line drawn while in measurement mode. DY: .

etc. the current work zone. This mode allows measurements to be made by dragging out a line on the current nest with the mouse cursor. and print reports for the current job. Reverts to the previous zoom level. if you are modifying the cut sequence. For example. Allows the user to choose what attribute of the nest to view when not zoomed in: the entire nest. the prompts in the status bar will change assisting in the process. empty plate on which to nest parts. Reports Edit Part List Edit Plate List Settings Select Mode Measure Mode Area Zoom Zoom Selected Zoom Out No Zoom Zoom Level • Status Bar This portion of the ProNest window displays what function is presently being performed. deleted. Returns to a view of the entire plate. rotated.90 • Standard New Job Open Job Save Job Output CNC Creates a new (empty) job Opens a previously saved job Saves the current job with the current job name Displays the Output CNC dialog used to specify the name and folder used to output the CNC files for each nest in the job Displays the Reports dialog used to choose. preview. rectangular region of the nest. used to add a new. Allows the user to view or edit the current ProNest settings This mode allows nested parts to be selected or unselected so that they can be moved. Deletes the current nest. or a best fit of the nested parts and the plate. Used to zoom in on a selected. Used to zoom in on the region of the selected parts on the plate. Deletes all nests in the job . • Nest New Nest Delete Nest Delete All Nests Displays the New Nest dialog window. Displays the Part List Editor which allows the user to add parts to the job part list or change the properties of existing parts Displays the Plate List Editor which allows the user to add plates to the job plate list or change the properties of existing plates.

All possible toolbars are listed with a checkbox next to it. Release the mouse button. remove the check (as shown below with Cut Sequence). To move a toolbar or menu. Toolbars To control which toolbars are displayed. ProNest will output code to cut up the skeleton before or after the nest is cut at the machine based on which option is selected. Used to interactively define a crop cut to the nest to remove unused material from the skeleton created by cutting the parts. Uses advanced techniques to calculate an optimal pattern of the selected part or group. . simply click on Customize from View Toolbars. This option must be enabled in the ProNest Settings. automatically using the current Autonest settings. the parts will be chain cut according to the previously determined ProNest settings. Skeleton Cut Up Cut Simulation Crop Start Autonesting Start AutoNesting (F2) Array Pattern Array Chain Array Common Line Cut Array Stop AutoNesting Customizing ProNest Desktop Layout With floating or “dockable” toolbars and menus. Each toolbar and menu is really a small “mini-window” that can be “docked” at a screen edge. simply click on the gray bar to either the left of the toolbar (if it is docked) or the title bar of the window (if it is floating) and drag it to the desired location on the screen. simply check the box. Begins nesting immediately. Used to view the path the machine takes as it performs its operations for the current nest. Displays the Autonest dialog box. To remove the icons from the ProNest desktop. Will common line cut parts that have been arrayed. or “float” as a small window on your desktop. This option must be enabled in the ProNest Settings. allowing changes to be made to the Autonest setup. and the window will appear with the toolbar in the new location. you can configure the ProNest desktop to suit your individual preferences. Clicking on OK will begin automatically nesting the parts listed in the part bar. When this is selected. Helps eliminate the chance of torch collisions and can significantly reduce production time. Interrupts the nesting process. Determines the spacing and number of the selected part or group that can be placed in a rectangular grid arrangement and then automatically arrays the parts.91 Cut Sequence Collision Avoidance Used to view or change the cut sequence for the current nest. to add a menu or toolbar. including spacing and orientation and then automatically arrays the parts. ProNest remembers the layout of the desktop and will return to this layout the next time you enter the program.

92 Options Menus show recently used commands first ProNest menus can remember which menu items you use most frequently and display those first. all menu items will be displayed. Click this Show full menus after a short delay Reset my usage data . If this option is not checked. This option is used in conjunction with the option above. If checked. You can then see all menu items by clicking on the down arrows at the bottom of the menu. the full menus will be displayed after a short delay. This button is used to clear the frequency data that is used to decide which menu items are first displayed.

When checked. . Displays shortcut keys for icons (if defined) with the ToolTips.93 button to reset your frequency data. the ProNest toolbar icons are drawn magnified. Large Icons Show ToolTips on toolbars Show Shortcut keys in ToolTips Menu Animations When checked. Controls the way menus appear when selected. ProNest will display descriptive hints when the cursor is positioned over an icon for a short period of time.

The name of this file matches exactly with the name of the machine. By default. Name File Extension Description Most machine settings are stored in the . see "What is a ProNest machine?".94 Chapter 7: ProNest Settings References What are ProNest Settings? ProNest settings control almost every aspect of nesting . Settings are represented by a ProNest machine. In this way. By default. they are located in: Program Files\MTC\ProNest 8\Settings\Machines The name and location of the Machine folder can be changed through Preferences. For example. a single settings configuration can be used for a wide range of cutting applications.cfg'. Together. these files provide all the information ProNest needs to import parts.from importing parts to nesting to generating CNC output. . The post processor (CFF) is a low-level settings file that describes a particular real-world machine controller. ProNest Machine .like the names of available processes.cfg file (machine configuration file).cfg files are saved in the same folder. Post processors are rarely modified and cannot be modified through ProNest. To learn more about ProNest machines. It also defines many properties of the controller . Most of the post processor contains simple code for generating CNC Output.cfg All . How are settings saved? Settings are saved in several different files. create nests. Post Processor .cff All post processors are saved in the same folder. they are located in: Program Files\MTC\CFF The name and location of the post processor folder can be changed through Preferences. and generate output. settings for a machine called 'Demo Plasma Machine' will be stored in a file called 'Demo Plasma Machine. They can be configured to automatically adjust for different processes and materials.

This way. you can simply change machines and generate your output. see "Saving your machine settings." To edit the settings in your current machine. for example. each ProNest machine has settings that match its intended controller. There are several different settings spreadsheet types: • • • • • • • AutoTab Bevel Costing Cutting Techniques Lead Styles Microjoint / Plate Handler Process Parameters Settings Table . Tip: Create a ProNest machine for every different machine controller you need to generate output for. It also contains settings that control everything from importing parts to automatic nesting to assigning a cut sequence. To create a new machine. For example. see "Editing a machine's settings." ." To save your machine settings. A settings spreadsheet allows certain settings to vary by a variety of conditions.95 Name File Extension Description ProNest settings can be configured to rely on simple spreadsheets. A ProNest machine contains all the appropriate settings for generating output that is correct for a specific machine controller. ProNest achieves this by using a ProNest machine. One . see "Creating a new machine. the default location for the Process Parameters spreadsheets is: Program Files\MTC\ProNest 8\Settings\Process Parameters The name and location of each of the spreadsheet folders can be changed through Preferences. might define lead settings for a variety of different materials and thicknesses. What is a ProNest machine? ProNest's ultimate task is to generate CNC output that is tailored to a specific machine controller. If you ever need to output a job for a different controller.xls Each spreadsheet type is stored in its own folder.xls file.

nif) is a copy of settings that existed when the job was last saved. If you open a job and select Restore settings from Job. Change Machine Changing the current machine will cause ProNest to discard the current machine settings and then reload all settings from the machine that is selected. you must save your settings. then the settings found in the job are recreated. It will reload settings from the . Open Job Contained in every job (.cfg when you create a new job. Restore (from the Settings dialog) Restoring your settings will cause ProNest to reload all settings from the . all changes are temporary. Note: Once settings have been loaded into memory. To make them permanent.96 A machine's settings are loaded during the following operations: New Job Creating a new job will cause ProNest to start with a fresh copy of settings. . Using the settings dialog General Layout The settings dialog is split into two main sections.cfg.

Restore OK Cancel Help . It will also change the plussign to a minus-sign .cfg file. Click the minus-sign to hide the sub-items. Action when clicked Saves all settings changes to the . Keeps your settings changes and closes the settings dialog. Opens the help topic for the current settings page. Use this in case you have made settings changes that you wish to discard. This will expand the tree-view to show all the sub-items directly underneath.. Until settings are explicitly saved.97 There are over 40 different settings pages available through this dialog. Using the Tree-view Every settings page is listed in the tree-view. Saves your current settings under a different name. Discards your settings changes and closes the settings dialog. all changes are temporary. The Buttons There are six buttons at the bottom of the settings dialog: Button Save Save As. To view and edit the settings for a particular page. Some pages in the tree-view are not always visible because they are contained underneath another page. Restores all settings from the . This will create a new machine and make it your current machine.. click on the plus-sign next to the item.cfg file. To keep them organized. they are presented in the tree-view on the left-hand side of the dialog. find it in the tree-view and click on it. To view these sub-items.

They only affect your current job. If you want to make your settings changes available to all future jobs that use your machine. you will notice that you are now using your new machine. or if you click Restore in the Settings dialog. Once you have opened the Settings dialog. This will remove the asterisk from the machine name and will update the . Note: All changes you make to a machine's settings are temporary. After you are done making changes. Click Cancel to discard your changes and return to the main window. For example: *Gas Machine All temporary settings changes can be lost if you open another job. Editing your settings will now affect this new machine only. click Settings . click Settings. The old machine still exists. you can make any kind of settings change you want. click OK to accept your changes and return to the main window. In the Job menu. Editing a machine's settings To edit a machine's settings. In the Save As dialog. click Save in the Settings dialog. From the settings dialog. an asterisk (*) will appear in front of the machine's name. but is no longer current. new machines are created from existing ones. 1. .cfg with all of your changes. 2. When you are done. change your machine. simply rename your current machine. To create a new machine. Right-click your machine in the status bar and click Settings. click the Save As button. open the Settings dialog: • • • In the Standard toolbar.98 Creating a new machine In ProNest. select or type your new machine's name and click OK. When settings are modified but not saved.

Each row in the spreadsheet thus defines a unique setting based on these parameters. are not offered in the default settings and may only be accessed via these spreadsheets. ProNest uses spreadsheets. To save your temporary settings changes as a new machine: 1.cfg) With the job (. a warning message will appear before it is overwritten. please contact MTC Software. If you entered the name of a machine that already exists. If you need to use microjoints and/or a plate handler.cfg with the name you specify. Type or select a machine name in the box and click OK. This will update the current machine's . Saving your machine settings Settings are saved in two different ways: • • With the ProNest machine (.cfg. such as cutting conditions for lasers. as well as profile type and profile area. This has no effect on the current machine's . Some cutting parameters. In these spreadsheets. . In the Settings dialog. users will find that the default settings are not able to provide a desired result. Your current machine will also change to this new machine. Saving with the Job Every time a job is saved. There are nine different types of spreadsheets: • • • • • • • • • Process Parameters Costing Interior Leads Exterior Leads AutoTab Cutting Techniques Bevel Microjoint* Plate Handler* * Note: The post processor (CFF) must be properly configured to make use of the Microjoint and Plate Handler spreadsheets. click Save As. For these kinds of settings. This will create a new . the current state of your settings are also saved in the job. users can differentiate settings based on material type and thickness.99 Settings tables (Spreadsheets) For certain settings. This allows for more comprehensive control over the cutting and nesting parameters. click Save.cfg with your changes. 2.nif) Saving with the ProNest machine To save your temporary settings changes: In the Settings dialog.

The post processor is the core of any ProNest machine. Processes The most important information on this page is in the Processes section at the top.000 in. you can see the name of the post processor (CFF file) and the processes that this machine is using. In this section. Advanced: The settings in the Processes section are not directly editable on this page. Machine Settings Physical location It is often advisable to create one ProNest machine for every physical machine you have. These processes will also appear in the Settings window's tree-view as children of the Machine settings page. Processes that are used by the ProNest machine will appear as normal text. Units: Length per minute Range: 0 to 10. This setting is informational only and simply provides an indication of where the real-world machine is located. While there are only two editable settings on this page. This file is usually tailored to match a specific real-world machine controller and will generally be named accordingly. click Add or Remove Processes. and punch). It also provides a controlled means of editing this configuration. The processes that a ProNest machine can have is limited to the list of processes described in the post processor. there is some information that helps to configure the settings for any ProNest machine that makes use of it. To change the post processor or to modify which processes are used. While most of the contents of a post processor is specific to output. One set of information in the post processor is a list of available processes. scribe.100 Machine This is the main settings page. Rapid rate This setting describes the machine's maximum traverse speed while the torch/head is off. Processes that are not used will appear disabled and will have the phrase '<not used>' next to them. The machine page shows the names of all processes listed in the post processor organized by process class (cut. it serves as a description of the machine's basic configuration./min Recommended Value: 600 in./min .

" The second page of this wizard is called "Reuse Existing Settings." Navigation Buttons Along the bottom of the Add or Remove Processes wizard are the following buttons: Button Back Next Finished Cancel Help Action when clicked Go to the previous wizard page. Opens help for the current wizard page.101 Add or Remove Processes The Add or Remove Processes wizard provides a controlled way to change the fundamental configuration of a ProNest machine. To access this wizard: On the Machine settings page. Accept your changes and exit the wizard. Discard your changes and exit the wizard." For more information about this page. For more information about this page. see "Reuse Existing Settings." The purpose of this page is to ensure that existing process settings aren't lost simply because changes were made on the previous page: "Select a Post Processor (CFF). . see "Select a Post Processor (CFF). click Add or Remove Processes. Go to the next wizard page." The purpose of this page is to allow changes to the post processor and/or to the processes that should be used by the current ProNest machine. Wizard Pages The first page of this wizard is called "Select a Post Processor (CFF).

." Note: You must select at least one cut process or the Next and Finished buttons will become disabled. This file is usually tailored to match a specific real-world machine controller and will generally be named accordingly. Adding a new process will introduce a new set of process settings that must be edited before any meaningful output can be expected. the processes listed will update. The purpose of this page is to allow changes to the post processor and/or to the processes that should be used by the current ProNest machine. To add a process to the machine: Select the process' associated check box. removing a process will destroy its existing settings. Every process supported by the selected post processor is listed in this section. Exercise caution when making any changes to the settings on this page and be sure to visit the next page in the wizard: "Reuse existing settings.102 Select a Post Processor (CFF) This is the first page in the Add or Remove Processes wizard. Likewise. To remove a process from the machine: Clear the process' associated check box. As the post processor changes. Important: Adding and removing processes from a ProNest machine is considered an advanced type of change. To change your post processor: Type of select the post processor name in the box. Changes of this nature are usually done once while setting up a machine for the first time. Post Processor The post processor is the core of any ProNest machine. there is some information that helps to configure the settings for any ProNest machine that makes use of it. This is because a ProNest machine is intended to mirror a real-world machine and the abilities of a specific realworld machine do not change often. While most of the contents of a post processor is specific to output. This section contains a combo box of available post processors found on your computer.

and a new 'SuperLaser' process is added with default settings. What happens: When you click Finished. Use settings from existing '<process name>' process If this is chosen when Finished is clicked. What happens: Now when you click Finished. on the first page of this wizard you select the new post processor. Example: Let's say that the settings for a given ProNest machine are perfect. The 'SuperLaser' process is defined as a 'New process'. but you need to switch the post processor to something else. . 2. So on the first page of the wizard. At this point. you select the 'SuperLaser' process and click Finished. then the process will be given new default settings. These default settings should then be edited to better suit the needs of the new process.103 Reuse Existing Settings This is the second page in the Add or Remove Processes wizard." Selected Processes All processes that have been selected on the previous wizard page will appear in a box in this section. For each process. This may be a valid result for some cases. Instead. Click the down arrow and select Use settings from existing 'Laser' process. For 'SuperLaser'. To use the old 'Laser' settings for your new 'SuperLaser' process do the following: 1. Then. you click Add or Remove Processes. On this page you can now see what is happening. but let's say that your intention was to use your old 'Laser' settings with the new 'SuperLaser' process. it has a cut process called 'SuperLaser'. The purpose of this page is to ensure that existing process settings aren't lost simply because changes were made on the previous page: "Select a Post Processor (CFF). Also. then the process will inherit all the settings from the existing process. On the Machine page. the following options are available: New process If this is chosen when Finished is clicked. Currently. click where it says 'New process' and a down arrow will appear. the only cut process defined is called 'Laser'. The old 'Laser' process is removed along with all its settings . How would you transfer these settings? Transferring settings from one process to another: Instead of clicking Finished on the "Select a Post Processor (CFF)" page. ProNest copies the 'Laser' settings into your new 'SuperLaser' process before it removes the 'Laser' process. click Next to advance to the "Reuse Existing Settings" page. the list of processes changes and you notice that the new post processor doesn't have a 'Laser' process. there is a warning below the process box telling you that the settings for the 'Laser' process will be deleted. ProNest re-configures your machine.

These properties are found in the Drawing Properties section of the Edit Part List window. Each of the settings on this page provides a default value for the drawing properties. When editing the drawing scale. . Millimeter (mm) Drawing scale Used only for CAD files. Changing a property value in the Edit Part List window has no effect on the setting that provides its default value. The value of this setting should match with the length unit that most of your files are saved with. Units: Percentage (%) Range: 0.1 to 1.104 Importing Parts Default Values for Importing Parts When parts are added to the part list. A part can be scaled as it is imported into ProNest. Choices:Inch (in. they are assigned certain properties like quantity and priority. Select the Drawing Scale box and click the down arrow.000.000% Recommended Value: 100% To edit the drawing scale: • • Type a value in the box. The CAD Import Tab General File units This is used when importing CAD or CNC files. the scale editor will appear: In the editor. you can enter a scale directly in the Scale box.). The file itself was saved using a particular length unit.

As values are typed in each box. For whatever reason. the value in the Scale box will update to match the ratio implied by the Drawing and Imported values. Select this check box if all layers found in a CAD file should be cut by the process shown. Example: If a machine supported both a Gas and a Plasma process. Example: In this example.helping to prevent open profiles. if Open profile tolerance is set to 0. When complete.005 in. Recommended Value: 0. Units: Distance Range: 0. Now when CAD parts are imported.5 mm in each drawing should be imported as 10 mm. CAD Layers The following settings apply only to CAD files: Cut all layers with [Cut Process] This setting is automatically named according to the first cut process used by this machine.[Plasma] .. if the first cut process was called "Laser". the Scale box will contain the value: 400%. For example. Type 10 in the Imported box. Cut . Click OK and the Drawing scale field will contain 400%. or smaller will be closed .0 in.005 in. most CAD files in our CAD folder must be scaled as they are imported into ProNest. a length of 2. 2.005 in. Open profile tolerance This setting specifies the maximum distance allowed for joining line and arc entities.[Gas] Cut .5 in the Drawing box. then there would be two rows here: Cut . In the scale editor: 1. gaps that are 0.105 You can also specify a scale by defining the ratio between a length in the drawing and the corresponding imported length. In other words. they will be scaled to 400% of their actual size in the drawing. Most applications will require that this checkbox be cleared.[Cut Process] Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular cut process. Type 2. Each cut process supported by the machine will have its own setting. then this setting would appear as "Cut all layers with [Laser]".001 to 1.

Example: A part file defines a part in one layer: "CUT". If Map to CAD color numbers is cleared.[Punch Process] Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular punch process. BOM Defines the CAD layers that contain BOM information. Display Only Defines the CAD layers that should be displayed in ProNest. .[MyPunch] Turret Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to the machine's turret process. The part is a simple rectangle with a hole in it.[Scribe Process] Defines the CAD layers that should be mapped to a particular scribe process. Each scribe process supported by the machine will have its own setting. then there would be one row here: Punch . then there would be one row here: Scribe . Each punch process supported by the machine will have its own setting.[Scribe-G] Punch . then one cut process must be mapped to "1" and another (or the same) cut process must also be mapped to "2". Importing the part in this way can result in one process handling the exterior profile while another process handles the interior profile. then a cut process must be mapped to "CUT" in order to import the part properly. Map to CAD color numbers Select this setting to allow importing parts by CAD color number instead of by layer name.106 Scribe . Example: If a machine supported a single scribe process called "Scribe-G". If Map to CAD color numbers is selected. but the interior hole has a color number of 2. Example: If a machine supported a single punch process called "MyPunch". but should not be cut. Importing the part in this way will cause the same cut process to cut both the interior and exterior profiles. The exterior profile of the part has a color number of 1.

Left. .you should select this option. Explode multiple parts Select this setting if there is more than one part on your drawing and you want to separate them as they are imported. If you are cutting with underwater plasma. Bottom Punch/Scribe first If selected. User drawn leads Having this setting selected means that a part can be pattern arrayed during AutoNest. duplicate or coincident entities (lines or arcs) are automatically deleted as the part is imported. Interior profiles will be cut clockwise and exterior profiles will be cut counter-clockwise. Lower-Right. select this setting. Note: This setting is active only when Contains multiple parts is selected.107 Options Leads origin This determines where the origin of the lead-in/out of the part is. Choices:Lower-Left. Upper-Left. Right-handed kerf compensation is also used. Reverse direction and kerf Select this to import parts with a reversed cut direction. Normally very light metal should not have the punching and/or scribing done first to avoid problems with metal movement. Top. will Punch and Scribe ALL parts before cutting. Right. Contains multiple parts If there is more than one part on your drawing. Upper-Right. in relation to the drawing being processed. Delete overlapped entities When this setting is selected.

A large tolerance will likely cause more smoothing to occur at the expense of a less accurate curve. 0. The Smooth tolerance value specifies a maximum distance from the approximated curve in which an arc can be formed. Smooth tolerance When converting a set of line segments into a curve.108 Quality Attaches a quality value to every entity.255 .255 (None) . Smooth entities Select this setting to convert curves made from line segments (approximated curves) into true arcs whenever possible.Each entity's color number (from the CAD drawing) will be used as the entity's quality number. The Nesting Tab Quantity Required This setting defines the default quantity used when importing parts.Quality values will not be attached to any entity in the part. Choices:(None). Range: 1 to 10. it is important to define how accurate the curve must be.All entities will be assigned the same quality value. Use CAD Colors.. Use CAD Colors ..000 Recommended Value: 1 . to Arc radius tolerance found on the Importing Part (Advanced) settings page. but similar. Advanced: The quality number can be used as a key into the process parameter table or as a way of outputting specific M-codes based on the quality number. 0. This tolerance value is opposite.

parts with a priority of 1 will nest before parts with a priority of 99. If a part is rotated manually to an angle that violates the part's rotation restriction. This rotation will become the part's "natural" orientation. Units: Degrees (°) Range: 0 to 360° Recommended Value: 0° Grain restraint When editing your part list. A value of 360° will restrict rotation completely allowing only the part's natural orientation. All things being equal. a value of 180° will limit valid part orientations to 0° and 180°. Units: Degrees (°) Range: 0 to 360° Recommended Value: 0° This setting is commonly used with parts that have grain restrictions (they must run parallel with the grain of the material). Priority Priority is used to sort parts for automatic nesting. Note: The grain restraint angle will not restrict parts that are rotated manually. . A value of 0° will allow any rotation. For example. Range: 1 to 99 Recommended Value: 5 Tip: A priority value of 99 is reserved for filler parts.109 Attributes Initial rotation A part can be rotated (counter-clockwise) when it is added to the part list by defining an initial rotation angle. Automatic nesting has already tried to place all other parts with a priority less than 99 on the plate. you can specify a rotation restriction that will be used when importing parts. ProNest will show the part in conflict. Filler parts are nested on a plate during automatic nesting only when: • • At least one non-filler part has already been nested on the plate. The grain restraint angle defines a set of valid part orientations.

Important: For CLC Quad to work with certain parts (triangles. Choices: (None).ProNest will decide which part orientation is best: natural or mirrored. Both (None) . you can specify a mirror value that will be used when importing parts. Mirror Only. . Fit ratio This ratio defines the cutoff for desirable clusters created automatically for parts with their Cluster property selected.110 Mirror A part's mirror value will affect how ProNest will nest the part during automatic nesting. The main reason to create a cluster is because it uses less space than two of that part placed next to each other. Choices: No Mirror. When editing your part list. The space used by two parts placed next to each other is used as the 'benchmark'.ProNest will always mirror the part. Either No Mirror .CLC clusters will not be built for the part. will build a pair and a quad CLC cluster. then the cluster is added to the Part List as a custom part. a pair CLC cluster (2 parts) will be built for the part. and CLC Array. CLC Quad.Pronest will never mirror the part. Cluster ProNest will automatically build clusters of parts that have this property selected. Pair.If possible. Units: Percentage Range: 50 to 100% Recommended Value: 90% Common line cutting ProNest will automatically build CLC clusters of parts that have this property set to anything other than (None). Pair . parts with only one square corner) the mirror value must be set to Either. Quad . Either . Quad.If possible. Both .If possible. a quad CLC cluster (4 parts) will be built for the part. An improvement is defined as follows: Improvement = Space used by the cluster / Space used by two parts If the improvement is better (less) than the fit ratio. Mirror Only .

3. Import Actions Retain all existing leads When the part is imported. The CIF is used to reverse-engineer a CNC output file into part information. leads will be added to the part. . type "cnc" in the box. ProNest can be configured to read CNC Output files too. 2. To do this. Type the file extension. Allow leads to move Having this setting selected means that a part's leads can be moved during AutoNest.111 AutoNest Properties Allow pattern array Select this setting if your part was drawn with its own leads. and Delete. ProNest can import part information from several different file types. to associate CNC files. Profiles that do not have leads will still have leads applied. Table of File/Controller Associations There are three buttons to the right of the table: New. Edit. 4. Add tabs Select this setting to AutoTab a part as its imported. Select the controller. Importing Parts (Advanced) File/Controller Associations After installation. Click New. If this setting is cleared. you have to match a file extension with a controller information file (CIF). Your defined file/controller associations are presented in tabular format. this setting will control whether or not the part's existing leads will be removed and replaced. To create a new file/controller association: 1. For example. Click OK. Select this setting to keep any existing leads where they are.

Units: Distance Range: 0. all arc motions will be processed as a set of straight line segments. To delete an existing file/controller association: 1.0 in. Select a file/controller association in the table. Arc radius tolerance When the radius of an arc motion exceeds the Maximum controller arc radius it is processed as a set of line segments. creating a smoother approximation. 2. Select a file/controller association in the table. Click Delete.112 To edit an existing file/controller association: 1. Advanced: If Maximum controlled arc radius is set to 0.0 in. Units: Distance Range: 0. You may specify a maximum arc radius if your controller is limited to a certain size. Recommended Value: 0. A smaller tolerance value will increase the number of line segments. Edit the file extension or select a different controller. Any arc greater than this value will be broken into line segments. Click Edit. 3.01 in. Recommended Value: 75000.0 in. 2. . A large tolerance value will result in fewer line segments as it creates a crude approximation of the arc. 4. Arc radius tolerance determines the accuracy of this approximation.0 to 75000. Importing CAD Files Maximum controller arc radius CNC Controllers may have limitations on the size of allowable radii.001 to 1. Click OK.

The process parameters used for beveled profiles are stored in the bevel settings table. all part changes made in Advanced Edit will be saved to the part's token file. . Otherwise. and feed rate at particular locations in the CNC code.tok extension). it is processed as if the file had never been imported before. kerf. it will be converted to a tab. This token file represents a "processed" version of the CAD file and will have the same name (except with a . During this process. Otherwise. When Save part file tokens is selected. Bevel Bevel Settings Settings table Most beveling applications require modification of process parameters such as voltage. This processing takes time. Units: Distance Range: -0. To improve the speed of importing CAD files you can select the Save part file tokens check box. current. Recommended Value: 0. Contact MTC to determine if you need to use this feature. ProNest uses tab auto-recognition size to determine if gaps in a cutting profile are tabs. CNC files are reverse-engineered (decoded) from controller instructions to part geometry.01 in.01 to 5.saving on processing time. Save Advanced Edit tokens If selected. the CAD file will be processed and a new token file will be saved. Importing CNC Files Tab auto-recognition size This value is used only when computer numerically controlled (CNC) files are added to ProNest's part list. The end result is that the part will load with all of the changes made in Advanced Edit. ProNest will search for its matching token file.0 in. If a gap is smaller than this value. If the CAD file hasn't been modified since the token file was created. The next time the CAD file is imported.tok) as each CAD file is processed. Note: This setting is active only when Save part file tokens is selected. Note: The trade-off with this speed improvement is the extra storage space needed for the token files.113 Save part file tokens Each time a CAD file is imported. Next time the CAD file is imported. Use text marker If your cutting machine controller has a special text-marking device you may have to check this option. the part's token file will be loaded because Save part file tokens is already selected. ProNest will import from the token file . ProNest will create an MTC token file (. it will be interpreted as a break in the profile.

114

To select a settings table: Type or select the name of the settings table in the box.

You can make changes to the selected settings table by clicking the this and other settings tables, see "Settings Tables (Spreadsheets)."

button. For more information on

Macro folder Macros

are often required for beveling applications. They are used to represent the required geometry and process parameter changes for beveling a profile or for changing bevel angles within a profile. All bevel macros exist in a single folder. To specify this folder you can: Type the full path in the box. -orBrowse for the macro folder.

To browse for the macro folder: 1. Click the button to open the Browse for Folder dialog.

2. Browse to the folder containing bevel macros. 3. Click OK. Advanced: A set of standard bevel macros are installed with ProNest. Due to the specific needs of your particular beveling application it is possible that these macros are not adequate. Please contact MTC Software if custom macros are needed.

Top angle orientation

This setting defines how top angles are specified. Some beveling machines use positive angles to define a top angle, but some use negative angles. Choices:Negative (-), Positive (+) Negative (-) Top angles will be referred to as negative angles. Positive angles will be used to represent bottom bevels. Positive (+) Top angles will be referred to as positive angles. Negative angles will be used to represent bottom bevels. This setting is primarily used for output purposes and for pulling the correct information from the bevel settings table.

115

AutoBevel Settings When adding CAD parts to your part list, ProNest can automatically bevel parts that contain bevel information. This information is embedded in CAD layer names.
Use AutoBevel

Select this setting if you have CAD files with bevel information contained in the CAD layer names.

Bevel angle - prefix

CAD layer names that begin with this prefix will be interpreted as layer names that contain AutoBevel information. By default, the prefix is "BVL".

Note: This setting is active only if Use AutoBevel is selected.

Bevel - Pass Profiles
Pass profiles are created when using multiple pass beveling. Multiple pass beveling allows more than one contour on entities in the part - this may include using two different bevels angles on the same entity or using a bevel angle such that the beveled portion of the entity does not account for the full material thickness. Pass Profile Sequence
Sequence order for pass levels

When making pass profiles, up to three types may be created: Top, Bottom, and Land. This setting allows you to choose the order in which they are cut. To modify the cut order: 1. Select the pass type that you want to move 2. Click on the Up or Down button.

Before making pass profiles
Remove existing leads

Select this check box to remove and replace leads on beveled profiles with the correct leads from the Bevel settings table. This action will occur during pass profile creation.

Remove existing loops

Select this check box to remove and replace loops on beveled profiles with the correct loops from the Bevel settings table. This action will occur during pass profile creation. While making pass profiles
Add leads and loops

Select this check box to have loops and leads applied during pass profile creation. Their exact properties will come from the Bevel setting table.

Add loops to non-beveled corners

116

Select this check box if you wish transition loops to be added to corners of the beveled profiles where the entities to either side are not beveled. Otherwise, transition loops will only be added to beveled corners.

Note: This setting is active only if Add leads and loops is selected.

AutoLoop threshold

Threshold angle used to determine which corners in a profile are candidates for automatically adding transition loops. Corners with an included angle less than this setting's value may have transition loops automatically added to them during pass profile creation. Units: Degrees Range:0 to 360° Recommended Value:135°

Note: This setting is active only if Add leads and loops is selected.

Compensate geometry

Some beveling machines achieve the correct torch location through varying the kerf and other parameters based on the bevel angle. Others require that the geometry of the profiles themselves be changed. Select this check box if your bevel machine requires that the profile geometry itself be compensated when beveling. Clear this check box if your bevel machine uses kerf and other process parameters to offset to the correct position when cutting the beveled profiles.

Torch height

Height of the torch above the plate. This value is used when compensating the geometry of beveled profiles. Units: Distance Range:0.0 to 100.0 in.

Note: This setting is active only if Compensate geometry is selected.

117 Pass profile strategy

When X, Y, and K cuts are defined for a profile, that profile must be broken into multiple profiles. The Pass profile strategy specifies how the motions derived from the original profile are re-combined into profiles that will be cut. Choices:Pass Levels, Mixed Levels Pass Levels When this strategy is used, each of the resulting profiles will be composed entirely of motions of the same type (top, bottom, or land passes). Mixed Levels When this strategy is used, the resulting profiles can contain motions of all types (top, bottom, and land passes).. If the original profile was closed, the Mixed Levels strategy will also produce a closed profile that is made up of the last remaining type for each motion in the original profile - as specified in Sequence order for pass levels.

Standard Plate Sizes
Defined Plate Sizes Every machine has its own list of standard plates sizes defined on this settings page. A machine can have any number of standard plates sizes: there is no upper limit. However, a machine must always have at least one standard plate size. All standard plate sizes are rectangular and are listed in "Length x Width" format. For example: 120.000 x 60.000 in. 3000.0 x 1500.0 mm
To add a new plate size:

1. Click Add. The "Add Standard Plate Size" dialog will appear. 2. Fill in the values for Length and Width. 3. Click OK.

To edit a plate size:

1. Select a plate size in the Defined Plate Sizes box. 2. Click Edit. The "Add Standard Plate Size" dialog will appear. 3. Change the values for Length and/or Width. 4. Click OK.

To delete a plate size:

1. Select a plate size in the Defined Plate Sizes box. 2. Click Remove.

118

Notes: • • The Remove button will be inactive when there is only one defined plate size. If you delete a plate size that is marked as the default plate, one of the remaining plates will become the new default plate.

The Default Plate Each machine must have a "default plate". It is this plate that is immediately available for nesting whenever you create a new job. Also, it is the default choice for new nests created either through the New Nest Setup dialog (manual nesting) or the AutoNest Setup dialog (automatic nesting). In the Defined Plate Sizes box, the default plate appears with a checkmark next to it. To set a plate size as the default plate: 1. Select a plate size in the Defined Plate Sizes box. 2. Click Set as Default Plate. Safe Zones (Default Plate Only)
Scheme

In the Scheme list, select the safe zone scheme that should be assigned to the default plate size. You can also create new schemes or edit existing ones in the list. Safe zones define areas on the nest that ProNest will consider as "unusable". Perhaps these areas are used for clamping, or maybe they define an area that should be left alone. Naturally, these kinds of areas shouldn't have parts nested on them. During any kind of automatic nesting, ProNest will avoid all safe zones. Also, during manual nesting ProNest will show conflicts between parts and safe zones. Sometimes, a particular group of safe zones can be used on several different plate sizes. This group is called a safe zone scheme. In ProNest, you can define safe zone schemes and then use (and re-use) them on any custom or inventory plate.

Important: The safe zone scheme selected here will be automatically applied to the default plate only. Whenever ProNest creates a nest from the default plate, it will use the safe zone scheme selected here.

Range: 1 to Number of torches Recommended Value: 1 Torch selection The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for "Torch selection". Then One . it will try to nest the part with only one torch. Whenever a part cannot be nested using the number of torches.119 Torches Torch Settings Number of torches This setting defines the maximum number of torches/heads that are possible. a small remainder of parts will not be nested. "Fixed. ProNest uses Torch selection to select how many torches are used. this setting identifies the master torch. Usually this setting will match the physical limitation of the machine. Unless each part quantity divides evenly into the number of torches. Variable: ProNest will first try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed. it will reduce the number of torches by one and try again. Then One".Similar to Fixed. This process is repeated until it has tried with only one torch.ProNest with try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed (specified by Number of torches). If it cannot place the part. Fixed . . Variable When AutoNest is run. Range: 1 to 100 Recommended Value: 1 Important: The remaining torch settings are active only if Number of torches is greater than 1. Choices: Fixed. Master torch number For multi-torch operations. Fixed.

Tip: Specify a value of 0 to allow any spacing. Units: Distance Range: Minimum torch spacing to 10. Note: This setting is activated only if Torch spacing type is set to Fixed. The spacing used by ProNest is always limited by the Minimum torch spacing. Variable: ProNest will first try to nest all parts using the maximum number of torches allowed. it will reduce the number of torches by one and try again. It is calculated by dividing the nest's width (ProNest y-axis) by the Number of torches. Equal: The torch spacing is based on the nest width and the maximum number of torches being used. Fixed: The torch spacing is always the same value (defined by Torch spacing) . the torch spacing will be no less than this value. The Part List toolbar also uses this value to define its own torch settings.0 to 10.this value defines the torch spacing used. Torch spacing The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for 'Torch spacing'. Recommended Value: 20. Torch spacing type The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for 'Torch spacing type'.000.regardless of the number of torches used. Whenever Torch spacing type is set to Fixed. Choices: Equal. The Part List toolbar also uses this value to define its own torch settings. If it cannot place the part. ProNest uses Torch spacing type to select the torch spacing. Units: Distance Range: 0.0 in. Fixed.120 Minimum torch spacing If parts are automatically nested using multiple torches. Recommended Value: 0. .0 in.0 in. Variable When AutoNest is run.0 in. This process is repeated until it has tried with only one torch.000.

Horizontal Recommended Value:Vertical Minimize torch changes If this is selected. ProNest will minimize the number of torch spacing changes during automatic nesting. ProNest will nest the part inside or near a previously nested part. each new part nested will used the same torch spacing as the previously nested part. Allowing work zones to overlap will usually yield a better nest than having non-overlapping work zones. Work Zone Settings Use work zones Select this setting to activate work zones. These cutting machines must divide the plate into smaller units in which to work inside. Note: This setting is used only when Torch selection is set to Variable. it becomes more likely that a part placed near a previously nested part will share the same torch spacing.121 Orientation Multiple torches can extend along either the y-axis (vertical torches) or along the x-axis (horizontal torches). Work Zones Some cutting machines cannot reach all areas of a plate without special processing.0% Recommended Value: 50% Note: This setting is activated only if Minimize torch changes is selected. Automatic nesting respects work zone boundaries during automatic nesting. Rather than calculating a part's spacing. Torch change factor This setting controls how often torch changes can happen. Choices:Vertical. When one work zone has been processed. Whenever possible. the machine moves to a different work zone and processes that until all areas of the nest have been processed. As the percentage increases.0 to 100. Units: Percentage Range: 0. .

Vertical repositions (along y-axis) [Not available] Select this setting to use work zones that subdivide the width of the plate into multiple work zones. This represents the size of the working area available to the controller at any given time. Note: This setting is intended to work with the Vertical reposition layout . . Work zone length Length (along the x-axis) of each work zone.which is not available.0 in. Units: Distance Range:0. Reposition in both directions Horizontal repositions (along x-axis) Select this setting to use work zones that subdivide the length of the plate into multiple work zones. Reposition in both directions [Not available] Select this setting to use work zones that subdivide both the length and width of the plate into work zones. Vertical repositions.1 to 10000.1 to 10000.0 in. Work zone width Width (along the y-axis) of each work zone. Choices:Horizontal repositions. Units: Distance Range:0.122 Layout This setting defines the type of work zones that this machine supports.

then the work zones will not overlap. the work zones will overlap. Note: This setting is intended to work with the Vertical reposition layout . then the work zones will not overlap. If this setting has a value less than Work zone length. Units: Distance Range:0.0 in. Units: Distance Range:0. Represents the horizontal distance a machine needs to shift to move from one work zone to the next. the work zones will overlap. then the work zones will not overlap. Vertical reposition distance Represents the vertical distance a machine needs to shift to move from one work zone to the next.1 to 10000.0 in. If this setting has a value greater than Work zone length. the work zones will overlap.which is not available.1 to 10000.1 to 10000. Examples: • • • If this setting has the same value as Work zone length. If this setting has a value less than Work zone width. Examples: • • • If this setting has the same value as Work zone length. unreachable gaps will be created between consecutive work zones. If this setting has a value greater than Work zone length.123 Horizontal reposition distance Represents the horizontal distance a machine needs to shift to move from one work zone to the next. If this setting has a value greater than Work zone width. unreachable gaps will be created between consecutive work zones.0 in. unreachable gaps will be created between consecutive work zones. If this setting has a value less than Work zone length. . Units: Distance Range:0. Examples: • • • If this setting has the same value as Work zone width.

3. Any tasks in Step 2 would then be completed in the "positive" direction. 4. Range:0 to 10000 Tip: Set Maximum repositions to 0 to allow an unlimited number of repositions. etc. see "Cut Sequence Rules. 3. For more information about cut sequence steps and tasks. the active cut sequence rule will be completed such that: 1. each step in the active cut sequence rule will be completed such that: 1. When all tasks in Step 1 is complete.124 Maximum repositions This setting limits the number of work zones for any given nest. 2. When this setting is cleared. Effect of "Allow forward and backward repositions" on the active cut sequence rule: When this setting is selected. Any tasks in Step 3 would then be completed in the "positive" direction . the machine will reposition to the first work zone.like Step 1. 4. All tasks in Step 1 will be completed as the machine repositions from the first work zone to the last (repositioning in the "positive" direction)..." . All tasks in Step 1 will be completed as the machine repositions from the first work zone to the last (repositioning in the "positive" direction). Allow forward and backward repositions Select this setting if your cutting machine can reposition both forward and backwards along the same axis.. 2. Clear this setting if your machine can only reposition in one direction. Any tasks in Step 2 would then be completed as the machine repositions from the last work zone to the first (repositioning in the "negative" direction). etc.

This means that clockwise cuts will change to counter-clockwise cuts. ProNest will ignore leads when determining part separation. The cut direction will reverse. Recommended Value:0. This allows ProNest to create a tighter nest but will most likely require movement of the leads to new locations where they avoid neighboring profiles.1 in. 0) and will be displayed in the nesting area with a plus Choices:Lower Left. The location specified can be interpreted as coordinate (0. Units: Distance Range:0. 2. Kerf is adjusted accordingly. Parts can be dragged from the Part List toolbar onto the nest. Ignore part lead-in/lead-out If this is selected. This means that clockwise cuts will remain clockwise.. conflict checking. To AutoDrop a part onto the nest: • • Double-click a part in the Part List toolbar Select a part in the Part List toolbar and press ENTER.0 in. Interactive (Manual) Nesting Parts can be manually nested in two different ways: 1. Select this check box to reverse the cut direction during mirror operations. The cut direction can remain the same. 2.. . This type of manual nesting is most useful when used together with AutoBump. Upper Right. Smaller nest resolutions can result in tighter nests and better conflict checking but will cause most operations to run slower. Clear this check box to maintain the same cut direction during mirror operations.01 to 1. . parts in the Part List toolbar can be added to the nest in the same relative spot.125 Nesting General Settings Nest resolution This setting controls many aspects of nesting (positioning parts. Using AutoDrop. Reverse cut direction on mirror When a part is mirrored on the nest (either manually or by automatic nesting) one of two things can happen to the cut direction: 1. There is a trade-off between accuracy and speed. Init point This setting represents the desired point of origin or home position. Lower Right symbol. Upper Left.) because it specifies how accurate you want ProNest to be.

. select Left. the part will be bumped down and left. It happens after a part is dragged onto the nest from the Part List toolbar or after an AutoDrop. In the AutoBump direction #2 box. The result is exactly the same as nesting a part manually and then using the bump handles to 'simulate' an AutoBump. select Down. the AutoBump settings will bump the part down and then left from the location where the part was dropped. Down. Center. When a part is dragged onto the nest.126 AutoDrop zone Defines the area of the nest where AutoDrop will place parts. (None) Example: To manually nest parts along the bottom of the nest: • • • • In the AutoDrop zone box select Upper Right. The effect of these setting is that parts added manually to a nest will be bumped towards the lower-left corner. Left. After an AutoDrop (like when a part in the Part List toolbar is double-clicked) the part will first be placed in the AutoDrop zone. In the AutoBump direction #1 box. Down. Choices:Up. Choices:Up. Right. The AutoBump settings define up to two bump directions that are applied in order. Left. (None) AutoBump direction #2 This is the second direction a part is bumped during AutoBump. Choices:Upper Left. Right. Use AutoBump Select this check box to use AutoBump during manual nesting. Then. AutoBump direction #1 This is the first direction a part is bumped during AutoBump. Lower Right AutoBump is a manual nesting feature that is performed when a part is manually added to a nest. Upper Right. Select the Use AutoBump check box. Lower Left.

OR • Hold the SHIFT key and press one of the arrow keys. All strategies use several techniques to calculate an optimal pattern of the selected part or group (including spacing and orientation). the Advanced strategy will find a tighter pattern than the Basic strategy. This will rotate the part counter-clockwise. Intermediate.0 to 10. . AutoNest Pattern Array Settings Default pattern array strategy When ProNest is started. To nudge a selected part: • Hold the SHIFT key and click one of the bump handles ( ). Recommended Value:0. In many cases. Pattern Array will use this strategy until a different strategy is selected. Units: Degrees Range:0 to 360° Recommended Value:180° To rotate a part selection by the "Increment angle": • • • Click Increment Angle Click Decrement Angle . but it will not attempt nearly as many part orientations. Units: Distance Range:0.000.127 Nudge distance This setting defines the distance a part moves when it is nudged. Advanced The difference between these three choices is speed and utilization. The Basic strategy will be much faster than the Advanced strategy. This will rotate the part clockwise. Click the upper-left rotate handle .0 in.1 in. ProNest arrays the parts using that pattern. . This will rotate the part counter-clockwise. Choices: Basic. Increment angle This setting defines the amount of rotation applied to a part selection when either the Increment Angle or Decrement Angle buttons are clicked. Once the optimal pattern is calculated.

therefore the straight edge factor would be higher than a nest of odd shaped parts. Current Nest means that ProNest will try to fill on all existing nest (starting with the current/visible) nest before it creates new nests. open the Pattern Array Strategies dialog by clicking on the Edit Strategies button in the "Pattern Array Settings" section. Choices: First Nest.. ProNest can start in three places: First Nest means that ProNest will try to fill on all existing nests (starting with Nest 1) before it creates new nests. the higher the number. . (i. Rectangles nest easily and neatly. Current Nest. this value will be used when AutoNest is run. The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for 'Begin nesting on'. The higher the estimated utilization. which tries to create a straight edge of parts for cropping. To edit these strategies. New Nest When AutoNest is run. AutoNest Settings Straight edge ratio This is used in estimating the area needed on the last plate of a nest.128 Advanced: Each of these strategies is defined by a group of settings. New Nest means that ProNest will not fill on any existing nests before it starts to create new nests.e. Units: Percentage (%) Range: 50 to 100% Recommended Value: 100% Begin nesting on When ProNest is first started.

Note: This choice is available only if you have the Rectangular Nesting option. or be placed inside other parts.to determine if each placement is truly optimal. Some will try fewer part orientations and others will attempt some of the arraying algorithms (pattern array. Choices: The choices presented depend on your authorized options Strategies available: Rectangular Rectangular nesting is a nesting strategy where ProNest places an imaginary rectangular border around each part. During this strategy. Note: This choice is available only if you have the True Shape Nesting option. Advanced: Each of these strategies (except Rectangular) is defined by a group of settings. CLC array). The parts are then nested in such a way that no part overlaps into the rectangular border of another part. Rectangular Optimization Rectangular optimization uses the same rules as Block nesting for placing parts. The strategy. open the AutoNest Strategies dialog by clicking on the Edit Strategies button in the "AutoNest Settings" section. As a strategy tries more possibilities the time needed to create a nest increases.instead of using the part's rectangular region. This means that parts can be nested closer together. . Each of these strategies employs different rules when nesting parts. ProNest also looks ahead a few steps for each nested part . this strategy tries to determine which parts fit together best. is more complicated and time consuming. To edit these strategies. Strategy 1-10 Strategy 1-10 are all very similar. Parts that fit together into efficient units (kits) are remembered and used several times. ProNest simply nests the parts one at a time. Note: This choice is available only if you have the Optimized Rectangular Nesting option.129 Strategy When ProNest is first started. They are different from Block nesting in that they use the part's true shape when determining where to place it . To create a nest. To create a nest. this value will be used when AutoNest is run. in the order they appear in the Part List toolbar. interlocked with other parts. The AutoNest Setup dialog will use this value as its default for 'Strategy'. however.

Move interior leads If this is checked. select either Basic. Upper Right. Click the Edit Strategies button in the Pattern Array Settings section. Note: This setting only applies to parts that have their Allow leads to move property selected. Choices: Upper Left. Left Note: This setting only applies to parts that have their Allow leads to move property selected. Right. . Bottom. To open the Pattern Array Strategies dialog: 1. ProNest will generate a nest and then calculate how many times that nest can be cut with the parts that remain. Lower Right. and Advanced. Go to the AutoNest settings page. <Strategy> Settings Note: The section name will change to match the current pattern array strategy. or Advanced. Lower Left.130 Cut each nest the maximum number of times If this is checked. Intermediate. then the section would read "Intermediate Settings". ProNest will move interior leads according to the same rules it uses for exterior leads. 2. Top. At the top of the dialog is a combo box that displays the current pattern array strategy. Otherwise. To edit the settings for a particular pattern array strategy: • In the Strategy box. leads will be moved on each nested part to the location specified by this setting. If Intermediate is selected. ProNest will move each part’s leads to the relative location specified by the Moving Leads Strategy setting. Moving Leads (AutoNest and Pattern Array) Strategy While parts are nested during automatic nesting or during pattern array. Intermediate. Pattern Array Strategies The Pattern Array Strategies dialog allows you to modify each of the three available strategies: Basic. interior leads are left alone. Automatically move leads If this is selected.

Smaller values will create tighter patterns. more patterns are attempted. but usually produces a tighter pattern. Cluster resolution (% of nest resolution) This setting represents the percentage of the nest resolution to use when creating the pattern. Values over 100% represent resolutions greater than the nest resolution. Intermediate This technique does everything Basic does. plus it will try to optimize the size of the pattern. which increases the time needed to find a good pattern. but will take longer to create. Advanced often takes longer. Choices:Basic. but uses more attempts to create a tighter cluster. It will also try to build a "three part" cluster. Intermediate. although 45° can help depending on lead placement. Units: Percentage Range:20 to 500% Try extra row If this check box is selected. The Basic technique builds a pattern in the least amount of time. It does everything Intermediate does. Advanced This technique works best for complicated parts. With a smaller angle. Advanced Basic A good technique for simple parts like rectangles. Units: Degrees Range:0 to 90° Tip: For circular and rectangular parts. . 45° is a generally a good value. For other parts. Sometimes a value of 15° or even 5° can result in significantly better patterns. This will increase the time required to generate the pattern.131 Cluster building technique This setting allows you to choose how good of a pattern you want created. Pattern rotation increment This is the angle by which to rotate the part before attempting to create the pattern. a value of 90° usually suffices. an attempt will be made to squeeze an extra row in the pattern.

either side by side or one above the other. 3. 2.indicating that you can change it. see "AutoNest Strategies Rectangular Optimization". Fill unused regions with new pattern If this check box is selected. Renaming strategies All of the strategies (with the exception of Rectangular Optimization) can be named to whatever you want. When you do. Tip: You can also right-click a strategy name to rename it.True Shape". This dialog allows you to edit the settings that define the behavior of each strategy. If you have purchased the True Shape module. To rename a strategy: 1. After the strategy is selected. the settings for that strategy will appear. then there will be ten strategies called "Strategy 1" through "Strategy 10". see "AutoNest Strategies . Type the new name for the strategy and press ENTER. If you have purchased the Rectangular Optimization module. select Rename and then provide the new name for the strategy. the AutoNest Strategies dialog will appear. The name of the strategy will become surrounded by an edit box . This will increase the time required to generate the pattern. ProNest will try to create the optimal combination of two patterns. . For more information about editing Rectangular Optimization settings. On the right. an attempt will be made to squeeze an extra column in the pattern. In the list on the left-hand side. it will appear at the top of this list. For more information about editing all other strategies. select a strategy to rename. AutoNest Strategies When the Edit Strategies button in the AutoNest Settings section of the AutoNest page is clicked. On the left-hand side of the AutoNest Strategies dialog is the list of available strategies. To edit the settings for a strategy: • Select the strategy on the left that you want to edit.132 Try extra column If this check box is selected. click on its name.

AutoNest Strategies . but the nests tend to have lower utilizations.133 Saving and discarding changes All changes made to settings in the AutoNest Strategies dialog are temporary. This includes changing strategy names. Having a high value leads to nests with high utilization. Units: Percentage Range:0 to 100% Recommended Value:90% Cutoff time This is the amount of time spent trying to nest multiple part combinations. Having a low value finishes each nest quickly. The larger the value. Once this time limit is reached. Units: Time (seconds) Range:0 to 60s Recommended Value:2s . General Cutoff nest utilization The percentage of the plate that must be used before rectangular optimization is done. but they can take longer to produce. the parts in the part bin) are considered.Rectangular Optimization Rectangular optimization is best used with parts that are rectangular in shape. To discard your changes: • Exit the dialog by clicking Cancel. Units: Percentage Range:0 to 100% Recommended Value:95% Stack cutoff utilization The percentage of the region of each individual horizontal or vertical stack of rectangularly optimized clusters that must be occupied by parts before that stack will be chosen. multiple part combinations are "deactivated" and only single part combinations (i. the nest is considered done. To accept your changes: • Exit the dialog by clicking OK. the longer each nest will take but it will result in better nests in some cases.e. The first time a configuration of parts meets or exceeds this value.

Range:0 to 1000 Recommended Value:500 . but the nests will have much higher utilizations. The higher this number. The larger this number. Build horizontal stacks If this check box is selected when a rectangular cluster is placed. the more trials are attempted and the tighter the resulting nest. Combinations Maximum parts per combination The maximum number of parts that ProNest will include in each combination it builds for rectangular optimization. Range:0 to 99 Recommended Value:6 . Low values for this setting will cause more parts to be used for rectangular optimization. the fewer parts will qualify as rectangular. ProNest will try to rectangularly optimize in the region directly above it. Units: Percentage Range:50 to 100% Recommended Value:90% Build vertical stacks If this check box is selected when a rectangular cluster is placed. but the resulting nests will have much lower utilizations.10 Maximum combinations This setting is the maximum number of combinations that will be created when creating candidate rectangular clusters for rectangular optimization.134 Look ahead Number of recursive levels in which to try rectangular optimization within the original available region. Range:0 to 99 Recommended Value:99 Part fit ratio The minimum percentage of a part’s bounding rectangle that must be filled by the exterior profile of the part for the part to be considered rectangular. ProNest will try to rectangularly optimize in the region directly to the side of it.

135 Maximum combination utilization This setting is the minimum percentage that a rectangular cluster must occupy of its bounding rectangle for it to be kept as a viable candidate for rectangular optimization. Pattern Array strategy The name of the pattern array strategy used during automatic nesting will appear to the right of the Pattern Array check box. Advanced To edit the strategy used: 1.True Shape Nesting direction This section contains two options: Vertical or Horizontal. this nesting direction will work towards completing the nest in such a way that it can be finished with a horizontal crop. Nesting approaches Rectangular Optimization Select this check box if rectangular optimization should be attempted during automatic nesting. Vertical Nesting will give preference to filling the plate from top to bottom before extending the nest horizontally. Click on the name of the strategy (its a hyperlink). Horizontal Nesting will give preference to filling the plate from side to side first before extending the nest vertically. Note: This setting is active only if Pattern Array is selected. this nesting direction will work towards completing the nest in such a way that it can be finished with a vertical crop. Select the strategy you want from the list. 2. Choices:Basic. In general. Units: Percentage Range:0 to 100% Recommended Value:90% AutoNest Strategies . In general. . Pattern Array Select this check box if pattern array should be used during automatic nesting. Intermediate.

Fill using CLC Array Select this check box if ProNest should attempt to fill unused regions of the plate with CLC arrays during automatic nesting. Choices:Level 1 . Try orientations in groups of <value> The number of orientations to try when placing a part during automatic nesting for each attempted rotation angle. and 270 degrees). Some parts. it will increase the time needed to place each part. Choices:Two. Note: This setting is active only if Pattern Array is selected. plus the chosen orientation rotated 90. Four Four orientations for each rotation angle will be tried (the chosen orientation. 180. . more orientations are tried for each part before moving on.with only 90° rotations. CLC Array Select this check box if CLC array should be used during automatic nesting. As the levels increase (by moving the slider down). Profile Nesting Options Maximum part orientations to try This slider controls the maximum number of rotations to try when placing each part. Four Two Two orientations for each rotation angle will be tried (the chosen orientation and the chosen orientation + 180 degrees). like rectangles. While this can improve the utilization on the nest. the description to the right of the slider will change. Some other parts may need more orientations tried before a good fit can be found. They can be nested well using Level 1 . don't require many orientations to try and find a good fit on the nest.136 Fill using Pattern Array Select this check box if ProNest should attempt to fill unused regions of the plate with pattern arrays during automatic nesting. Note: This setting is active only if CLC Array is selected.7 Note: As each level is selected.

The region of nested parts will "grow". Plate usage Nesting a part will sometimes extend the region of already nested parts by some distance along the X axis. Select this check box to use this distance as a measure of how good the fit is.meaning that the new part doesn't really interlock with existing region of nested parts.137 Rotate to minimize part area Select this setting if the parts should be rotated to minimize their bounding rectangles before they are nested. The following settings are in a group called Fit Evaluation: Part interlock Every newly nested part interlocks with existing parts on the nest. Sometimes. Select this check box to use the amount part interlock as a measure of how good the fit is. Advanced Common Line Cut Select this check box if common line cut parts should be built as the parts are nested. but it does take more time. the amount of interlock is zero . This often results in a better nest. . Nest interlock Every newly nested part interlocks with the region of the nest that already contains nested parts. Important: This setting is independent of the CLC Array setting. the amount of interlock is zero . Sometimes. Tight fit Select this check box if ProNest should try to "wiggle" parts after they've been nested to get them to fit tighter.meaning that the new part doesn't really interlock with existing parts. Select this check box to use the amount nest interlock as a measure of how good the fit is.

that result is automatically chosen. The user has full control over the sheet selection methodology and the nesting strategies to use. then the best overall utilization is chosen. Select One Plate Size . Select One Plate Size. If no nesting trials exceed this value. and so on. Select Best Plate For Each Nest . Choices:(None).All nests created during optimization will be created from a single plate size. Select Best Plate For Each Nest (None) . The first plate in the plate list will be optimized first. The best result will be chosen. then nesting trials with the remaining parts will be performed on the remaining plates and the best result chosen. Optimization Settings Plate selection criteria Algorithm to use when selecting plates to use for each nesting trial. Cut-off utilization When a nesting trial produces a nested utilization equal to or greater than this value. as well as whether or not costing factors are included when determining the best nesting result. then the second plate. etc.138 Optimization Optimized nesting tries one or more nesting strategies with one or more plate sizes to find the best plate and strategy for the parts remaining in the part list at any given time. Units: Percentage (%) Range: 0 to 100% Recommended Value: 95% .All nesting trials will be performed on all plates in the plate list.Plates will be nested in order.

Otherwise. Calculating the utilization in this way will allow optimization to select the "tightest" nest from the available candidates for the last nest. If Use straight crop utilization on last nest is selected. the last nest is usually different from all previously generated nests. Include production costs Select this setting if production costs (such as the cost of consumables) should be included when determining the best trial.will have a poor utilization.up to the crop line. 3. the utilization of the last nest will not be calculated with respect to the full plate size. If all of the priority-1 parts don't fit on the first nest. When optimization calculates the best nest it uses the nest's utilization as a major determining factor. The last nest . an imaginary straight crop line will be used and the utilization will be calculate with respect to the used portion of the nest . the part list has been almost completely depleted and the remaining parts cannot fill an entire nest. all parts with a priority of 1 will be nested on the first nest. Select each nesting strategy that should be attempted during optimization.139 Nesting strategies to use This setting displays the nesting strategies that have been chosen to use for the nesting trials during optimization. all optimization results will be discarded unless all parts can be nested. By the time the last nest is generated. To select strategies for optimization: 1.which is usually only partially filled . Use filler parts when calculating utilization Select this setting if you wish filler parts to be included in utilization calculations. Click OK to accept the selection. a message will appear indicating there is no optimize solution. Instead. 2. these parts are ignored when computing a nest's utilization. Use straight crop utilization on last nest During optimization (or any kind of automatic nesting). . Must nest all parts If this setting is selected. Must nest all priority 1 parts on first nest If this setting is selected. Click on the down-arrow in the Nesting strategies to use box.

. 2. Click on the current value . Furthermore. The following settings provide a way to assign importance to trials nested on remnants vs. To edit the cost factor: 1. These other cost factors are used for remnants of at lease a certain age: If older than <age period> days. older remnants can be made to appear "cheaper" to use than younger remnants.its a hyperlink.140 Material Costs Include material costs Select this setting if the cost of the material used (for the nested parts) should be included when determining the best trial.its a hyperlink. Cost factors for remnants Remnants can have three different cost factors. Click OK. All remnants will use this first cost factor unless they qualify for one of the other two cost factors. To edit any of these values: 1. The smaller the percentage multiplier. Click OK. use a cost factor of <age factor>%. These cost factors can be used to adjust the material cost in favor of using remnants. 3. Enter a cost factor in the box. those nested on full plates. Click on the current value . These settings are only active if Include material costs is selected: Full Plates: Use a cost factor of <value>% When the cost of a particular full plate is calculated. The first value defines the base cost factor for remnants: Remnants: Use a cost factor of <cost factor>%. it is multiplied by this cost factor. Enter a new value in the box. 3. the smaller the effective material cost will be. 2.

The vertical cut sequence type will create a meandering pattern as it cuts up one vertical band and down the next. Parts are added to the cut sequence in groups . . First. the nest is divided into vertical bands (see Cut Sequence Settings: Range).based on their number of torches. Within the rules for each type. all parts with the next highest number of torches are added. By Heat Dissipation. By Number of Torches This is a variation of the Vertical cut sequence type. Then. Horizontal. It will then gradually move away from the init point. the cut sequence will always start closest to the cut sequence init point.based on the Vertical cut sequence type. By Torch Spacing.141 Cut Sequence Cut Sequence Settings Type This defines the method used to create a nest's cut sequence. One-Way Vertical. all parts with the highest number of torches are added to the cut sequence . the nest is divided into horizontal bands (see Cut Sequence Settings: Range). Horizontal First. The horizontal cut sequence type will create a meandering pattern as it cuts across one horizontal band and back the next. Choices: Vertical. This process continues until all parts with one torch are added to the cut sequence. Head Dissipation By Number of Torches Vertical First. By Sequence. By Number of Torches.

based on their torch spacing.found on the "Nesting" settings page. By Heat Dissipation Creating a cut sequence by heat dissipation will distribute the heat input across the nest to avoid overheating.. One-Way Vertical This is a variation of the Vertical cut sequence type. This process continues until all parts with one torch are added to the cut sequence. This usually results in a randomized cut sequence. heat dissipation will be used on the next set of parts sharing the same torch information. Usually. normal heat dissipation can cause an unacceptable number of torch changes (number and/or spacing). Selecting this type will activate the Heat Dissipation settings. By Sequence Parts are added to the cut sequence in the same order as they were nested. Then.. Heat Dissipation By Number of Torches will perform the normal heat dissipation on all parts on the nest that use a particular number of torches and spacing. Choices: Lower Left. One-Way Vertical will only cut upwards through each vertical band. Upper Left. Selecting this type will activate the Heat Dissipation settings. Init point The cut sequence init point defines the plate corner where the cut sequence will start. all parts with the next largest torch spacing are added. Upper Right . Lower Right. When multiple torches are used on a nest. and so on. all parts with the largest torch spacing are added to the cut sequence . First. When all those parts are cut.based on the Vertical cut sequence type.142 By Torch Spacing This is a variation of the Vertical cut sequence type. Parts are added to the cut sequence in groups . Instead of alternating the direction by cutting up one vertical band and down the next. this will be the same as Init point . Heat Dissipation By Number of Torches This is a variation of the By Heat Dissipation cut sequence type.

To think of this another way. Choices: Start Point. the nest is divided into bands of equal size. Center Point Zones When creating the cut sequence. Most cut sequence types will cut all parts within a zone band before moving on to the next one. Units: Distance Range: 0.143 Sort point All cut sequence types will create a cut sequence that starts cutting parts closest to the init point and finishes with parts farthest from the init point. The direction of the bands depends on the cut sequence Type. Each cell in the grid has a heat value.0 in.0 in. the distance is measured from the init point to a point on the part . To create a cut sequence. the corresponding cell's heat value will increase.0 to 10. The number of bands is defined by Zones. . Units: Distance Range: 0. parts are sorted by distance from the cut sequence init point.0 in. Range: 1 to 99 Recommended Value: 20 Heat Dissipation Creating a cut sequence based on heat dissipation is very different from the other cut sequence types. This grid is used to determine which part should be cut next. Recommended Value: 20. The sort point can be either the start (pierce) point or the geometric center of the part. Recommended Value: 20. Before the first part is added to the cut sequence. Y grid spacing Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the width of the plate (ProNest's y-axis). ProNest will randomly cut from the coolest cells in the grid (those with the lowest heat value).0 in.000. a grid is generated on the nest. As parts are cut. X grid spacing Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the length of the plate (ProNest's x-axis).000.the sort point. For sorting purposes.0 to 10.

Interior Profile Interior Profile Sequencing Interior profile sequencing sequences interior profiles. parts are bridged or chained together. Note: Heat Dissipation settings are usually inactive. The sequence of interior profiles is calculated when: • • • • a CAD file is loaded. Units: Distance Range: 0.0 to 10. . and text marking. punches. you must set Type to one of the heat dissipation choices. cuts. they are never re-sequenced unless one of the above events occurs. Cut Sequence . Recommended Value: 0. This means that changes to the Interior Profile settings will not have any immediate effect on any nests in the job.000. Important: Once the interior profiles of a part are sequenced. including scribes. parts are common line cut with one another.0 in.0 in.144 Minimum distance Whenever possible. the next part added to the cut sequence will be at least this distance away from the current part. profiles are reordered for collision avoidance. To activate them.

Interior profiles will be sequenced in a generally left to right (or right to left) direction.The existing sequence for interior profiles is not recalculated. Closest to Init Point. Closest to Sort Point.An algorithm which seeks to limit the amount of heat generated in any particular zone will be used to sequence the profiles. Horizontal.The next profile to be sequenced will be the one whose start point is closest to the end point of the current profile. Right. By Heat Dissipation Recommended Value:Vertical (None) . Closest to Center . Left. . Upper Left. Choices: Lower Left.The next profile to be sequenced will be the one whose center point is closest to the center point of the current profile. Vertical. Horizontal . Vertical .Interior profiles will be sequenced in a generally upward (or downward) direction. By Heat Dissipation . Closest to Center. Bottom Recommended Value:Same as Init Point from the Cut Sequence page Note: This setting is active only when Type is set to something other than "(None)". Choices:(None).Profiles are sequenced in the order of their distance from the chosen cut sequence Init point (found on the "Cut Sequence" settings page). Closest to Sort Point . Origin The origin setting allows the user to specify the location on the part's bounding rectangle from which to start sequencing.145 Type This defines the method used to create a part's interior cut sequence. Upper Right. They are ordered from closest to farthest. Lower Right. Closest to Init Point . The first profile sequenced will typically be the one closest to this origin point using the appropriate measure for the particular type of sequencing chosen. Top.

Recommended Value: 0. the profiles in the next zone are sequenced in the other direction (so that they are getting closer to the edge containing the origin point).146 Zones The number of zones represents the number of horizontal or vertical bands that will be used to sequence the interior profiles.000. Units: Distance Range: 0. Once all profiles in that zone have been sequenced. As interior profiles are cut. Units: Distance Range: 0. In general. Y grid spacing Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the width of the part (ProNest's y-axis). sequencing starts in the first zone and profiles are sequenced as they get generally farther away from the applicable edge containing the origin point. the next interior profile added to the cut sequence will be at least this distance away from the current interior profile.0 in. Minimum distance Whenever possible.0 in. . Range: 1 to 99 Recommended Value: 10 Note: This setting is active only when Type is set to "Vertical" or "Horizontal". X grid spacing Specifies the heat dissipation grid size along the length of the part (ProNest's x-axis). ProNest will randomly cut from the coolest cells in the grid (those with the lowest heat value). the corresponding cell's heat value will increase. Recommended Value: 24. alternating sequence direction in subsequent zones until all zones have been sequenced.0 in.000. Note: The Heat Dissipation settings are active only when Type is set to "By Heat Dissipation".0 to 10.0 in. Recommended Value: 12. Each cell in the grid has a heat value. To create a cut sequence. Heat Dissipation Creating a cut sequence based on heat dissipation is very different from the other cut sequence types.0 to 10.0 in.0 to 10. This grid is used to determine which interior profile should be cut next. Sequencing continues.000. Before the first interior profile is added to the cut sequence.0 in. a grid is generated on the part. Units: Distance Range: 0.

To jump to a settings page that contains a particular setting: • Click on the Settings button to the right of the setting in question. This section contains all the normal settings that help control the cut sequence when a true cut sequence rule is not in use. By default. the bottomhalf of the settings page displays a section called Cut Sequence Settings. as each of them already exists on another settings page. The active rule is marked with a .Cut sequence order While you can edit these repeated setting on this page. Use settings instead of rules By default.Cut Sequence page: Pre-pierce by part Skeleton Cut Up . There are two ways to create a new rule. For a full explanation of how a cut sequence rule is built and how it works. Available Rules The list of available rules is at the top of this page. The first rule is always called "Use settings instead of rules".Pre-pierces page: From the Skeleton Cut Up . The following settings are displayed in the Cut Sequence Settings section: From the CNC Output page: Punch/Scribe first Order punches by process Order scribes by process Order cuts by process Ignore for output From the CNC Output . . click Convert this to a Rule. This button is found in the section header titled: "Cut Sequence Settings". Method 1: 1.147 Cut Sequence Rules This settings page displays all the cut sequence rule that are available for the current machine. you can also jump to the settings page that they belong to. see "Editing a cut sequence rule". this is the only rule in the list. Type a name for your rule in the box and click OK. Creating and using true cut sequence rules True cut sequence rule are far more flexible than using the regular settings. 2. this is the Active Rule. When this rule is selected. They are displayed here as "repeated" settings. While Use settings instead of rules is selected.

148 Method 2: 1. In the list. select the rule you want to be active. Actions For the purposes of cut sequencing. Click Add. you will be using the New Rule / Edit Rule dialog. For a full explanation of how to read and understand a cut sequence rule. This view is the same as in the Cut Sequence Rules setting page. On the left is Unsequenced actions. tasks are grouped into steps. only this one is editable. On the right is a list of actions that are assigned to the selected task in the view above. 2. To make any rule the Active Rule: 1. This method will use your existing settings to create a rule that will work the same as if you keep Use settings instead of rules as your Active Rule. This will open the New Rule dialog. the bottom-half of the settings page shows a view of the rule. Click Set as Active Rule. At the top of the dialog is a view of the rule. Method 1 is the easiest way to create a rule if you are creating your first cut sequence rule. Edit your rule and click OK. Editing a cut sequence rule As you edit a cut sequence rule. Most of the time. The anatomy of a cut sequence rule Cut sequence rules are built on actions. At the bottom of this dialog are two lists of actions. . a machine will not support cut sequence steps. And finally. see "Editing a cut sequence rule". These actions are grouped into tasks. This view matches exactly with the view you see when editing the rule. Note: When a true cut sequence rule is selected. 2. an action refers to a specific profile type that can be completed by a single machine process. if you are using Work Zones.

bridges. that exist inside the part's exterior profile. These profiles qualify as CNC edge pierce profiles. Because of this process distinction. When parts share common edges with the plate edge. several of the profile types can be repeated . When the exterior profile is cut.). be sure that Use pre-pierces is selected on the CNC Output . of various shapes. They do not touch the plate edge. Any cut process Depending on your machine's configuration.149 Available actions Profile type Pre-pierce Description Completed by Process The pierces on a part are considered separate from Any cut or punch the rest of the profile they belong to. the exterior profile is attached to the plate edge. Any punch process Any scribe process Any cut or scribe process The main exterior of a part. For example. To make use of pre-pierces.. Anything completed by a punch process (except pre-pierces).Pre-pierces settings page.etc. the entire part will drop (unless it is held in place by tabs. Profiles of this type generally refer to holes.once for each process that can complete it. Any cut process CLC edge pierce profile Crop Exterior skeleton line Interior skeleton line Any cut process Exterior skeleton lines are those that touch the plate Any cut process edge. These profiles qualify as edge pierce profiles.. The cut generally made to separate a nest into a skeleton and a remnant. nothing will drop when it is cut. Profiles of this type can be sequenced independently from either interior or exterior profiles. if a machine has a Gas and a Plasma process. Anything completed by a scribe process (except Text Marker). then there would be two separate actions for exterior profiles: Exterior profile (Gas) Exterior profile (Plasma) . pre-pierces can be sequenced independently. When a profile is open. Interior skeleton lines connect parts only. Any cut process Punch Scribe Text Marker Exterior profile Interior profile Any cut process Open profile Any cut process Edge pierce profile When parts are edge pierced. their exterior profile is Any cut process attached to the plate edge.

If there were three tasks in a rule. it is sufficient to define a rule only using tasks and actions. If you need an action (or set of actions) to be cut before or after other actions. For example. The machine can then be instructed to reposition from work zone to work zone until everything is cut. steps are ordered within the cut sequence rule. Otherwise. Then. They would be handled in order until all actions in all the tasks were complete. you would be able to sequence exteriors cut with gas independent from exteriors cut with plasma. Editing the rule (Simple view: Actions and Tasks only) When you create a new rule. Steps allow a nest with repositions to be processed in several passes. Steps Lastly. and a Task 3. to be sure that interior profiles are cut before exteriors. the machine would be instructed to reposition to all work zones until all prepierces are cut. then there would be a Task 1. Regardless of the actions present in the next step. A step refers to a collection of tasks. For example. This list will always show the actions that have been assigned to the task selected above. Sometimes it is useful to complete only certain actions in a work zone. create a task and assign the interior profile action to that task. you can sequence the task however you want. and then complete those same actions on the new work zone. At the bottom-left of the New Rule dialog. Steps are only needed when using work zones. a Task 2. be sure to give it a name. At the top. for example. Why steps? When work zones are used. Tasks For the purposes of cut sequencing. After the actions have been completed across the entire nest. the first step in a rule may cut all pre-pierces. Tasks. then reposition to the next work zone. a cut sequence rule is truly defined by its tasks. Notice that the name of the list at the bottom-right will change to "Task 1 actions". we have the steps. different actions will be processed. For machines that do not use work zones. the machine can be instructed to make another pass across the nest only this time. Tasks within a step are processed in a specific order. however. are ordered within the cut sequence rule. When a new rule is started. the task can be ordered before the task that contains the exterior profile action. Once that is done. a nest is generally split into more than one work zone. Only then would it move on to any actions in the next step. Without steps. it will be given one empty task: Task 1. select Task 1. a machine would have to fully complete the current work zone before repositioning to the next work zone.150 In the above example. Also. . you will see a list of unsequenced actions. put them in a task. Actions within a task are not ordered in any specific way by the cut sequence rule. a task refers to a collection of actions. To name your rule: • Type a name in the Name box.

2. Once selected. and removing tasks. To remove a task: 1. Tip: Regardless of the selected task. Click Remove. Using this feature. A new empty task will be inserted after the selected task. you can select a task that contains an action you want to move. you can then drag an action from the list at the bottom-right into the desired task at the top. 2. you can drag any action from either of the bottom lists into the desired task in the rule view at the top. Assigning and removing actions The most important aspect of a task is the list of actions it contains. arranging. To assign all actions to the selected task: • Click . Select a task to remove. OR • Select any number of unsequenced actions and click . To arrange tasks: 1. . OR 2.151 Adding and removing tasks An important aspect of editing a cut sequence rule is adding. To add new tasks: • Click Add Task. Select a task to move. Click Move Up and the task will move up one place. Click Move Down and the task will move down one place. To assign actions to the selected task: • Double-click an unsequenced action.

You can also edit the avoidance paths directly on the nest. Collision Avoidance Optional Feature: This settings page is available as part of the Collision Avoidance option. To remove all actions from the selected task: • Click . click OK to save your changes and close the Edit Rule dialog. Collision Avoidance Settings Enable collision avoidance Select this setting to enable collision avoidance.with a full raise Note: Not all cutting machines differentiate between a partial raise and a full raise. Automatically move exterior leads for avoidance Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should automatically move leads on exterior profiles. The settings on this page allow avoidance paths to be generated automatically before CNC output is generated. By moving leads. Collision Avoidance is intended to eliminate the chance of collisions with existing material which can significantly reduce production time.152 To remove actions from the selected task: • Double-click a task action. Avoidance paths are generated by a combination of: • • • moving leads routing rapid traverses around potential tip-ups raising the torch . . Note: The remaining settings on this page are active only when Enable collision avoidance is selected. Ignore tabbed profiles Select this setting if you want to treat tabbed profiles as if they cannot tip up and therefore do not need to be avoided. OR • Select any number of task actions and click . When you are done editing your rule. it is possible that straight-line paths can be found that do not pass over potential tip-up situations.

Sequence the interior profiles for an optimal path Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should re-sequence the interior profiles of each part. Profiles with lengths and widths greater than this threshold value will not be avoided. Also keep in mind that an avoidance path may take much longer than a direct full raise path. Select this setting if ProNest should try shortening the leads to resolve the conflict. Sometimes they can be moved into conflict. Resequencing profiles may allow for potential torch head collision situations to be avoided. . The primary factor in determining a good value for this setting is the average amount of plate warpage present and the relative importance of avoiding tip-ups compared with the speed of cutting. Note: The sequencing method used by collision avoidance is specified by the sequencing settings found on the "Cut Sequence . Units: Distance Range:0. Units: Distance Range:0.001 to 10000. Maximum torch down distance to avoid This setting represents the maximum length allowable for a torch-down avoidance path. Resequencing interior profiles may avoid potential collision situations. Collision avoidance will try to avoid any profiles with a length or width smaller than this threshold value.Interior Profile" settings page.153 Automatically move interior leads for avoidance Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should automatically move leads on interior profiles. Place leads on corners whenever possible Select this setting if leads should be placed on profile corners rather than on the side. leads are moved. Clear this setting if you do not want to resequence profiles during collision avoidance. The "zone of acceptability" for placing leads on the corners rather than on the sides is related to the smallest dimension of the profile. Maximum profile size to avoid This setting determines the largest profile size that collision avoidance will try to avoid.0 in. Trim leads if they are placed in conflict While avoidance paths are generated. Select this setting if you want collision avoidance to try resequencing the interior profiles of each part. Note that the sequencing method used by collision avoidance is specified by the Profile Sequencing settings on the Cut Sequence page.0 in.001 to 10000.

Avoidance ratio This setting is used when determining which type of path is more desirable in a given situation: an avoidance path or a direct full-raise path.0 s Torch diameter This setting represents the diameter of the torch head and is used as a safety margin around profiles when creating avoidance paths. Units: Time Range:0.154 Maximum number to avoid This setting determines the maximum number of profiles that should be avoided when traversing between profiles. It should be treated as the maximum diameter of the torch head that could collide with a tip-up.0 to 100.001 to 10. Units: Percentage (%) Range:0 to 100% Full raise/lower time This setting represents the average amount of time required to fully retract the cutting head on a full raise and then fully lower the cutting head when it is turned back on. A larger avoidance ratio will tend to select a direct full-raise more often than the avoidance path.0 s Partial raise/lower time This setting represents the average amount of time required to partially retract the torch for a partial raise and then fully lower the torch when it is turned back on. Smaller values will cause collision avoidance to run much faster than larger values. . Range:0 to 10 Recommended Value:3 Advanced: This setting has a major impact on the time needed to calculate avoidance paths. Units: Time Range:0. Units: Distance Range:0.0 in.0 to 100.

Units: Distance Range:0. Advanced Collision Avoidance Settings Enable collision avoidance Select this setting to enable collision avoidance.0 in.155 Snap tolerance When moving leads for collision avoidance. This setting is repeated from the Collision Avoidance settings page. Don’t move leads for the last interior profile (in each part) Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should not move leads for the last interior profile in each part. Automatically move interior leads for avoidance Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should automatically move leads on interior profiles. it becomes more likely that several instances of the same part will have identical geometry on the nest. Your post processor (CFF) must also be configured to handle subroutines. By keeping the leads in place for the last interior profile of each part. Making this value large makes it more likely that only corner lead locations will be chosen.0 to 10000. Notes: • • This setting is active only when Automatically move interior leads for avoidance is selected. Resequencing interior profiles may avoid potential collision situations. This setting is important when outputting CNC code for lasers which use subroutines. Making this value small makes it less likely that a corner lead location will be chosen when moving the leads on any particular profile. Note: The remaining settings on this page are active only when Enable collision avoidance is selected. This setting is repeated from the Collision Avoidance settings page. . Sequence the interior profiles for an optimal path Select this setting if generating avoidance paths should re-sequence the interior profiles of each part. This setting is repeated from the Collision Avoidance settings page. Having many parts on the nest with identical geometry greatly improves the effectiveness of subroutines. Collision Avoidance (Advanced) Optional Feature: This settings page is available as part of the Collision Avoidance option. this setting is used to determine how close to a corner a selected start point has to be before the leads are adjusted to be exactly at that corner.

Units: Distance Range:0. This setting defines the upper limited for the length of an edge pierce extension. Tip: Select this setting if you are concerned about too many subroutines being created for CNC output meant to run on a laser machine.0 in. Only parts that lie within this distance of a plate edge (or skeleton profile) will be considered for edge piercing. Do not create avoidance paths away from exterior profiles Select this setting if a direct full-raise path should be created from every exterior profile to the next profile in the cut sequence. Edge Pierce Edge Piercing is a method of extending a part’s lead-in to the edge of the plate (including a hole in a skeleton).0 to 10000.156 Note: The sequencing method used by collision avoidance is specified by the sequencing settings found on the "Cut Sequence . avoidance paths are generated only for traverse motions from interior profiles. Move leads (if necessary) Select this setting if you wish ProNest to try moving leads during edge piercing. . When this is selected. especially on thick material. If no favorable position is found. including other edge pierce extensions. The leads will not be moved into conflict with any other parts or the edge of the plate. Note: The Plate Edge Threshold settings will be active only when the value of Maximum length is greater than 0. Edge piercing will not generate edge pierce extensions that are in conflict with other parts. Build similar optimized paths inside similar parts Select this setting if all copies of the same nested part should have the same interior cut sequence. Warning: This functionality has not been implemented yet. This allows for faster pierce times. the leads will remain in their original location and the part will most likely not be edge pierced. Edge Pierce Settings Maximum length An edge pierce acts as an extension to a part's existing lead-in. Leads may move to a location from which edge piercing is possible.Interior Profile" settings page. based on the value of Maximum length.

storage.0 to 10. Recommended Value: 0. Distance The distance by which the edge pierce extension will be lengthened (or shortened). The General Tab Plate edge tolerance The closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line may approach the plate edge if no extension values are used. Skeleton Cut Up Settings Enable skeleton cut-up Select this setting if you would like to activate skeleton cut-up. . Note: The following settings are active only if Enable skeleton cut-up is selected. or disposal of the skeleton. Non-zero extension values take precedence over this setting.0 in.1 in. Stop before the plate edge Select this setting if you need the edge pierce extensions to stop short of the edge of the plate or a skeleton profile. Units: Distance Range:0 to Maximum length Skeleton Cut-Up Skeleton cut-up allows the user to slice the skeleton into smaller pieces.157 Plate Edge Threshold Only one of the following settings may be selected at any given time: Extend past the plate edge Select this setting if you need the edge pierce extensions to extend beyond the edge of the plate or into a skeleton profile. This is typically done to aid in the movement. Units: Distance Range:0.

0 in. Ignore part lead-in / lead-out Select this setting if it is acceptable for skeleton cut-up lines to cut through part leads. . Units: distance Range:0. Part tolerance This defines the closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line may approach a part.0 to 100. Recommended Value:0. set this value to 1. Recommended Value:0. For example. if you wanted a skeleton cut-up line to start or stop no closer than 1 inch from a safe zone. Recommended Value:0. Minimum cut length Minimum acceptable length of a skeleton cut-up line.0 in. For example. set this value to 1.0 to 10.158 Safe zone tolerance This defines the closest distance to which a skeleton cut-up line may approach a safe zone. Units: Distance Range:0. All skeleton cut-up lines below this threshold value will be deleted during processing. if you wanted the skeleton cut-up line to start or stop no closer than 1 inch from a part on the nest. Units: distance Range:0.0 in.1 in.0 in.5 in.1 in.0 to 10.0 in.

Bottom to Top. Choices: Left to Right. Right to Left All horizontal skeleton cuts will be cut from the right edge of the plate to the left edge of the plate. Right to Left. . Bottom to Top All vertical skeleton cuts will be cut from the bottom edge of the plate to the top edge of the plate. Serpentine Top to Bottom All vertical skeleton cuts will be cut from the top edge of the plate to the bottom edge of the plate. Choices:Top to Bottom.159 The Cut Direction Tab Horizontal lines Direction which horizontal skeleton cut-up lines will be cut. Serpentine The cut direction of horizontal skeleton cuts will alternate between Left to Right and Right to Left. Serpentine The cut direction of vertical skeleton cuts will alternate between Top to Bottom and Bottom to Top. Serpentine Left to Right All horizontal skeleton cuts will be cut from the left edge of the plate to the right edge of the plate. Vertical lines Direction which vertical skeleton cut-up lines will be cut.

0 to 1000. The Extensions Tab Top edge Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the top edge of the plate. Default No special cut direction will be applied to the segments of skeleton cut lines that touch the plate edge.0 in.0 in. .0 to 1000. Units: Distance Range:0.0 in.160 Lines at the plate edge Defines the behavior of skeleton cut lines that touch the plate edge. Recommended Value:0. Cut away from the plate edge. Recommended Value:0. Bottom edge Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the bottom edge of the plate. Cut away from the plate edge The portion of the skeleton cut line that touches the plate edge will be cut so that it starts at the plate edge and is cut towards a part (if possible).0 in.0 to 1000.0 in. Units: Distance Range:0. Units: Distance Range:0. The normal cut direction used by the rest of the skeleton cut line will be used.0 in. Default Cut towards the plate edge The portion of the skeleton cut line that touches the plate edge will be cut so that it starts at a part (if possible) and is cut towards the plate edge. Choices:Cut towards the plate edge. Left edge Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the left edge of the plate. Recommended Value:0.

Skeleton Grid Skeleton cuts are defined by a grid that is laid on top of the nest. In this case. the following settings are available: Vertical grid spacing This setting specifies the desired spacing between vertical grid lines. a single skeleton grid will be used to determine where the skeleton is cut.0 in. Note: The following settings are active only if Enable skeleton cut up is selected.. Units: Distance Range:0. . this determines the maximum length of skeleton pieces. Grid Settings Enable skeleton cut-up Select this setting if you would like to activate skeleton cut-up. Recommended Value:0.. In effect. Grid lines are evenly spaced along the nest’s length and width.0 in. Use separate grids for exterior and interior skeleton cuts Select this setting if you want to use different grid spacing for interior skeleton cuts and exterior skeleton cuts. Units: Distance Range:0.0 to 10000.0 in. Skeleton Cut-Up . so any grid spacing values specified by the user are target length and width values only. is cleared. If Use separate grids. This setting is repeated from the Skeleton Cut-Up page.0 to 1000.161 Right edge Distance to extend the skeleton cut line beyond the right edge of the plate.

Units: Distance Range:0. you can define when skeleton lines are cut in relation to parts. 2. Advanced: If Use separate grids. The exterior grid will have is own settings to define horizontal and vertical grid spacing . Select an item in the list that you want to move.as will the interior grid.Cut Sequence Advanced Skeleton Cut-Up Settings Enable skeleton cut-up Select this setting if you would like to activate skeleton cut-up. and exterior skeleton cuts. this determines the maximum width of skeleton pieces.0 in. This setting is repeated from the Skeleton Cut-Up page. you can select the relative order between parts. see "Skeleton Cut-Up .162 Horizontal grid spacing This setting specifies the desired spacing between horizontal grid lines. Do one of the following: • • Press the up button Press the down button to move the selected item up in the sequence order. interior skeleton cuts.0 to 10000. see "Cut Sequence Rules". If you are using interior and exterior skeleton grids. This setting can be found on the Skeleton Grid page.. Note: The following two settings are active only if Use separate grids for exterior and interior skeleton cuts setting is selected.Skeleton Grid". If you are using a single skeleton grid. . In effect. is selected. Note: The following settings are active only if Enable skeleton cut-up is selected. you can simply order the cut sequence for parts and skeleton lines. Advanced: Cut sequence rules can provide greater flexibility over when skeleton lines are cut.. To edit the sequence: 1. For more information. then two separate skeleton grids will be used to determine where the skeleton is cut. to move the selected item down in the sequence order. Cut sequence order Using this list. For more information about setting up single or double skeleton grids. Skeleton Cut-Up .

0 in. followed by all horizontal exterior skeleton cuts. starting at the init point.163 Exterior cut order Defines the order in which exterior skeleton cuts are made. Choices:(None). Cut vertical lines first All vertical exterior skeleton cuts are made first. Tip: This setting is useful if you are worried about the pieces of the skeleton created by skeleton cut up tipping up as the exterior skeleton lines are cut. A crop extension allows the pierce point to move off the plate (a positive extension) or onto the plate (a negative extension). Traverse along the plate edge between exterior cuts Select this setting if you would like the torch head to follow along the plate edge between exterior skeleton cuts. or to track back down the just cut exterior skeleton cut if cutting the other end of it which touches the plate edge. If the torch head were to run into one of these tipped up pieces of plate. Crop Crop Settings Extension A crop line is always defined with respect to the plate edge. . Units: Distance Range: -10. Circle the plate (clockwise) Exterior skeleton cuts are made in a clockwise direction around the plate. Recommended Value: 0.0 to 10. a lot of damage could be done to the cutting head or the cutting machine itself. followed by all vertical exterior skeleton cuts.0 in. Cut horizontal lines first All horizontal exterior skeleton cuts are made first. Cut vertical lines first. Circle the plate (clockwise). Cut horizontal lines first (None) Exterior skeleton cuts are made in the order in which they were created.

The setting reads: Use only if the remnant area improves by at least x%. To allow one crop for each work zone.000. You can force ProNest to accept the L-shaped crop line only if it beats Step 1 with a better (larger) remnant. Step 2: Find the best L-shape crop If this step is checked. This step is always checked. Choices:Nest. 2. select Work Zone. . Click OK.² Recommended Value: 500. Work Zone Allow nesting outside the crop If this setting is selected. Type a value for L-shape crop improvement in the box. ProNest will first find the best vertical (straight) crop line. 3. This means that the vertical crop from Step 1 will be used unless the remnant calculated in step 2 is at least x% larger. only one crop is allowed per nest and Nest will be selected in the box.164 Allow one crop for each nest This setting is available only if you have the Work Zones module. Click the % value (its a hyperlink).0 in.0 in. To edit the L-shape crop improvement: 1. Normally. ProNest will try to improve on Step 1.0 to 100.² Step 1: Find the best vertical crop When finding a crop line. An L-shaped crop has one (or two) 90degree turns resulting in an L-shaped remnant.000. AutoCrop Settings Minimum remnant area All calculated crop lines will be rejected unless they produce a remnant with at least this much surface area. parts that are nested outside the crop (in the remnant) will not be shown in conflict. Units: Area Range: 0.

Click the % value (its a hyperlink). This does not include webs that share the plate edge. This means that the best crop line from the previous steps will be used unless the remnant calculated in step 3 is at least x% larger. Remnant Webs When ProNest creates a crop line (especially when Step 3 is checked) it can create remnants that have useless. Click OK. Recommended Value: 12.0 in.0 in. is that the crop line usually has significantly more motions. thin spokes of material. .000.0 to 10. Use the following settings to have ProNest adjust the crop line to remove these webs from the remnant. Type a value for profile crop improvement in the box.165 Step 3: Find the best profile crop If this step is checked. 3. This method generally creates a remnant with the most area.0 to 10. 2.000.0 in. Any such web thinner than this value will be removed. ProNest will try to improve on the previous steps. Units: Distance Range: 0. however. Minimum width .along plate edge Webs that share the plate edge are considered separately. Units: Distance Range: 0. The setting reads: Use only if the remnant area improves by at least x%.0 in. Minimum usable web width ProNest will remove any webs that are thinner than this value. To edit the profile crop improvement: 1. Recommended Value: 6. You can force ProNest to accept the profile crop line only if it beats the previous steps with a better (larger) remnant. The tradeoff. A profile crop is built by trying to stay as close to the parts as possible.

000.000.00 Costing Settings (By Process) Each tab in this section contains costing settings for a specific process supported by your machine.00 to 1.00 (Monetary Units) Recommended Value:25.00 Labor cost per hour The hourly rate you pay for labor for the people involved in the running of your cutting machine.000. Units: Currency Range:0. .166 Costing Operating Costs Cost per hour The hourly cost of running the cutting machine exclusive of labor costs. Units: Currency Range:0. Units: Currency Range:0. The weight used in the calculation is the weight of the cut parts as opposed to the weight of the full sheets.000.000.00 to 1.00 (Monetary Units) Recommended Value:80.00 to 1.000.000.00 Plate loading cost The cost of loading a single plate of material onto the cutting machine. Units: Currency Range:0.00 Labor cost per weight The amount you pay the people involved in running the cutting machine per unit weight.000.00 to 1.000.00 (Monetary Units) Recommended Value:0.000.00 (Monetary Units) Recommended Value:0.000.000.

OR • you are using a settings table. Units: Currency Range:0.000. .00 Note: This setting is not available for punch processes.000.00 to 1.0 to 12000.10 Default cost per minute The cost per minute of using the process.000.00 (Monetary Units) Recommended Value:0. but not while turning the process on and off.0 s Default activation cost The cost incurred in turning on and turning off the process. but a material and thickness used in your job cannot be found in the settings table.00 (Monetary Units) Recommended Value:0. Default activation time The amount of time to turn the process on (also used as the time to turn the process off). Units: Seconds Range:0.167 Settings table This setting specifies which settings table is used for costing. Units: Currency Range:0. This cost should include the cost of the consumables used while using the process.0 s Recommended Value:3. which contains all the XLS files found in the Costing spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Tip: To edit or view the spreadsheet. This should also include the cost of the consumables used during this time.000.000.00 to 1. The next three settings are used if: • you are not using a settings table.000. You can select any settings table from the list. click the Edit button.

Choices: Normal. Incremental All motions are defined with respect to the controller's current position. Example: If a raw value is 12. it might be output as: 12.346(Extra precision) . Extra Normal Output with reduced precision: usually 2 or 3 decimal places. Choices: Absolute. kerf values. The list of DLLs to choose from is populated with the valid output DLLs in the ProNest\Program folder. Recommended Value:outdll The Code Format Tab Basic Formatting Mode Defines how motions are output.34567. including coordinates.35(Normal precision) 12. Incremental Absolute All motions are defined with respect to the initialization (home) point. The actual number of decimal places is governed by the CFF itself.168 CNC Output CNC Output Settings Output DLL This setting allows the user to choose which output DLL to use to generate CNC code. Precision This setting governs the number of decimal places output for many floating point values in the CNC file. Extra Output with enhanced precision: usually 3 or more decimal places. and feedrates.

Start of Part (None) Line numbers are not added to output.51 G41 M21 G01Y0. Millimeters (mm) Additional Formatting Line numbers in CNC Defines how line numbers are added to output files. Every Line Line numbers are added to every line of output.75 . Every Line. . Generally speaking. Example: (None) % G70 G91 G00X0.7Y0.. Choices: Inches (in.75 ... if outputting in "Inches".).. Example: Every Line % N1G70 N2G91 N3G00X0.7Y0. Exceptions include comments and the start/end line containing a single "%". Choices: (None).51 N4G41 N5M21 N6G01Y0. no conversion value is applied to the output coordinates.169 Units This setting controls the units used to output the CNC file.

Range: 1 to 100 Recommended Value: 1 Example: Setting the increment to 1 will number the lines 1. Note: This setting is active only if Line numbers in CNC is set to something other than "(None)"...51 N4G41 N5M21 N6G01Y0. Example: Start of Part % G70 G91 N1 G00X0. . 15. % N1G70 N2G91 N3G00X0.as determined by the CFF. ...51 N20G41 N25M21 N30G01Y0. 10..75 . 3.7Y0.75 ..7Y0. 2.7Y0. .170 Start of Part Line numbers are inserted before the start of each part or profile .75 .51 G41 M21 G01Y0. % N5G70 N10G91 N15G00X0.... Setting the increment to 5 will number the lines 5.. Line number increment Defines the increment for line numbers added to output files.

Example 3: Clear the CNC file extension setting Output a single nest with the name: MyJob Output file: MyJob Example 4: Clear the CNC file extension setting Output three nests with the name: MyJob Output files: MyJob. Before ProNest begins generating output.cnc Clear this setting and ProNest will generate an output file that has no extension.cnc Output files: MyJob01. MyJob. MyJob03.cnc.N2. unique file names will be created automatically. Example 1: CNC file extension = cnc Output a single nest with the name: MyJob.171 Program number This setting allows the user to specify a program number to be inserted into the first CNC file output for each job. unique file names will be created automatically.999.cnc. This dialog provides a default file name that uses the CNC file extension.N1. MyJob02. Range: 0 to 99. it will prompt for a file name in the Output CNC dialog. If multiple nests are output. If multiple nests are output.N3 . The exact way that this setting is used (or whether it is even used at all) is determined entirely by the particular CFF being used.999 Recommended Value:0 The Output Files Tab CNC Output File CNC file extension Defines the file extension for CNC files generated by Output CNC.cnc Example 2: CNC file extension = cnc Output three nests with the name: MyJob. MyJob.cnc Output file: MyJob.

. an MTC token file version of the nest will be output to the same location as the CNC file. depending on where ProNest was installed. The Options Tab CNC Output Options Include machine parameters in output Check this setting to enable machine parameters (such as kerf and feedrate) to be inserted into the CNC files as they are output. Generate data files during output Select this setting to produce a data file along with the output CNC files.as well as information about the parts contained on each nest. click the button. the output folder will be the Default output folder. While the specified folder is incorrect. This will cause ProNest to save the data files in the same folder as the CNC files. Data file location Data files will be placed in the folder specified by this setting. ProNest will remember the new folder and use it next time CNC output is generated. Use long file names Select this setting to allow ProNest to generate long file names for output files. These parameter values may be specified through the Process Parameters page for each process. CNC files will be output to the following folder: C:\Program Files\MTC\CNC This folder may have a slightly different path. Note: If the specified folder does not exist. Before ProNest begins generating output. Click the button to browse for the folder. Note: This setting is activated only when Generate data files during output is selected. Initially.3 file naming convention). it will prompt for a file name in the Output CNC dialog. To clear this setting. a yellow warning symbol will appear to the left of the field. Clear this setting to limit output file names to 8 characters (commonly known as the DOS 8.172 Default output folder ProNest will save output files in the folder defined here. If output is saved to a folder other than the default output folder. Data files contain information about each nest in a human-readable format . Additional Output Files Generate token files during output If this setting is selected. but the Output CNC dialog allows you to browse to any folder.such as utilizations and init points .

all punches using a particular process will be done before the next punch process is used.173 Punch/Scribe first If this setting is selected. Normally. all punches will be grouped together by process. For each nest. Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected. Note: This setting should be selected when cutting with underwater plasma. Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected. all scribes will be grouped together by process. Complete all cut profiles on the nest If this setting is cleared. then each part on the nest will be fully processed before the next part is started. Order scribes by process If this setting is selected. Stop before scribing If this setting is selected. code will be inserted to cause the machine to stop before scribing begins. very light metal should not have punching or scribing done first . then each nest will be processed in the following order: 1. For each nest. Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected. Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected. Stop before punching If this setting is selected. Profiles within each part are processed in their natural order. all scribes using a particular process will be done before the next scribe process is used. code will be inserted to cause the machine to stop before cutting begins. Advanced: This setting may be overridden through the use of Cut Sequence Rules. Stop before cutting If this setting is selected. Order punches by process If this setting is selected. Complete all punches on the nest 2.to avoid problems with metal movement. . Complete all scribe profiles on the nest 3. Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected. code will be inserted to cause the machine to stop before punching begins.

Note: If the cutting machine is slow at kerfing the CNC code. the plate size is validated. Traverse to the opposite corner of the plate 3. Insert part name as comment Select this setting if a comment should be output in the CNC file before the first profile of each part. Inc. Otherwise. Return to initialization point When this setting is selected. If this setting is cleared. This comment typically gives the sequence number of the part and the part name.174 Order cuts by process If this setting is selected. a special post processor (CFF) may be required. Traverse back to the initialization point 4. the torch will remain in its position at the end of each nest. To facilitate this. Important: Select this setting only if the machine is capable of arranging torches automatically. kerf right. For each nest. The procedure for this typically consists of the following actions: 1. ProNest will insert a stop code to allow an operator to manually adjust the torches (quantity and/or spacing) whenever they need to be changed. Pre-kerf Selecting this setting will remove all kerf left. all cuts using a particular process will be done before the next cut process is used. all cuts will be grouped together by process. Please contact MTC Software. ProNest will insert code to automatically change the torch spacing at the cutting machine. and kerf off commands from the CNC code. . Start with the torch head at the initialization point 2. ProNest will alter the part geometry to compensate for this change. If this setting is selected. Begin normal processing of the nest Enable automatic CNC torch spacing If this setting is selected. if you require this ability. they may contain stop codes. you may want to select this setting. ProNest will return the torch to the initialization (home) point at the end of each nest. these stop codes will be removed when output files are created. Note: This setting is activated only when Punch/Scribe first is selected. Strip stop codes from CNC part files When CNC files are added to the Part List. Validate plate size When this setting is selected.

Click the process list hyperlink. a CFF may be configured to always output in incremental mode or without the ability to output machine parameters in the CNC file. While many CFFs are already set up for this functionality. The settings which activate functionality resident in the CFF are: • • • • • • • Include machine parameters in output Line number in CNC Program number Return to initialization point Insert part name as comment Validate plate size Enable automatic CNC torch spacing CFFs may override the values of Mode. Please contact MTC for further assistance if you feel you have one of these CFFs. 2. The list of ignored processes will be highlighted and underlined . Select the processes you want to ignore during output and click OK. To edit the list: 1. the CFF may override the settings in the above list. . Important: CNC Output settings and the Post Processor (CFF) Certain CNC Output Settings require specific capabilities to be present in the CFF in order to function properly. and Units. In addition.like a hyperlink. Note: This setting is ignored if Cut Sequence Rules are used. Precision. it is possible that you may require changes to your CFF before it will work correctly.175 Ignore for output Processes listed here will not appear in the CNC file. For example.

Enable only for materials thicker than <value> in. Torch Blow Through All pierce holes are created simply by piercing each start point. The value is highlighted and underlined . Pre-pierce as Punch. Click the value (its a hyperlink).0 to 100 in.like a hyperlink. Type a value in the Pre-pierce threshold box. Recommended Value: 0.176 CNC Output .so it is possible to control exactly when profiles are pre-pierced. Units: Distance Range: 0. Torch Blow Through Pre-pierce as Circles All pierce holes are created by piercing and cutting a small circle. 2. Pre-Pierce Settings Use Pre-pierces To enable pre-piercing of profiles. Pre-pierce as Punch If the machine has a punch. select this check box. The settings on this page help to define exactly how these prepierces should be made. the machine can be instructed to create a pierce hole that will serve as the starting point when the profile is cut. all pierce holes are punched. Process .0 in. Choices:Pre-pierce as Circles. Pre-piercing can be limited to materials that are thicker than a specific value.Pre-Pierces Before each profile is cut. To edit this setting: 1. Note: The following settings are enabled only when the Use Pre-pierces check box is selected: Style This setting defines the method used to pierce holes. Pre-pierces are represented by an action that can be sequenced through Cut Sequence Rules .

When Style is set to Pre-Pierce as Circles or Torch Blow Through. the choices are limited to valid cut processes.like a hyperlink. Radius This setting defines the radius for circle pierce holes. pre-pierces are done for the entire nest before any profiles are cut. Pre-pierce by part If this setting is selected. When an interior profile drops out. When this setting is cleared.Auto Height Control Auto Height Control Settings Disable for interior profiles smaller than <value> in. Important: This setting is used only if the active Cut Sequence Rule is 'Use settings instead of rules'. Auto height control is disabled for the entire profile (from the end of the lead-in to the end of the lead-out). The value. 2.000 in.01 to 10. CNC Output .0 in. Note: This setting is useful for machines where the cutting head tends to follow the surface of the material being cut. Units: Distance Range: 0. This setting is activated only when Style is set to Pre-Pierce as Circles. then pre-pierces are done on a part-by-part basis. the choices are limited to valid punch processes. is highlighted and underlined . When Style is set to Pre-Pierce as Punch.177 This setting defines the process that will be used to create pierce holes. This means that the profiles for a single part will be pre-pierced and cut before moving on to cut the next part. Specify the Auto height control threshold.2 To edit the value: 1.5 in. Auto height control threshold.risking damage. the cutting head on these machines may dive into the hole . Click the value (it’s a hyperlink). . A true cut sequence rule would dictate exactly when pre-pierces are to be cut and this setting would be effectively ignored.0 to 10.2 Recommended Value:0. Units: Area Range:0.2 Disabling of auto height control can be limited to interior profiles that are smaller in area than a specific value. Recommended Value: 0.0 in.

That setting takes precedence for interior profiles.. value. before the lead-out Disables auto height control the specified distance before the beginning of a lead-out. Recommended Value: 1. Important: The value of this setting is used only at the moment when a nest's skeleton is created. Specify the Disable no further than. and open profiles. Click the value (it’s a hyperlink). • • • The value for Disable for interior profiles smaller than… is set to a non-zero value -orThe Disable for all lead-outs check box is selected -orThe Disable for crop lines check box is selected. Units: Distance Range: 0. This setting is active only if Disable for all lead-outs is selected. If this setting is not selected.0 in. exterior. Re-enable before the torch turns off Select this setting to re-enable auto height control immediately before the cutting head turns off at the end of the lead-out.178 Disable for all lead-outs Select this setting to disable auto height control at the beginning of the lead-out. This setting is active if.0 to 10.0in. However. Note: This setting applies to interior. To edit the value: 1. Disable no further than <value> in... 2. Disable for skeleton lines Select this setting to disable auto height control for skeleton cut up lines. The value is highlighted and underlined – like a hyperlink.. this setting does not apply to interior profiles that already fit the criterion defined by the Disable for interior profiles smaller than… setting. Disable for crop lines Select this setting to disable auto height control for crop lines. the auto height control will be re-enabled immediately after the cutting head turns off at the end of the lead-out. .

Inc.000. Choices:Left. Step and Repeat Settings Use step and repeat Select this setting if you wish to use step and repeat mode during output. this setting should be set to either Up or Down. Units: Distance Range:0. this setting should be set to Left or Right. Changing the Init Point To change your init point: 1. 2. As you change the init point. Offset Each repeated row or column will be offset this distance from the previous row or column. This will cause the corner to become temporarily highlighted.Step and Repeat Step and Repeat allows the CNC file to be repeated along the length or width of the plate.0 in. CNC Output . In the center of the plate are 3 buttons which allow you to modify the output axis. Likewise.179 CNC Output . in the event that changes are required to your post processor (CFF). Click the left mouse button to select the new init point.0 to 10. Hover the mouse over one of the corners of the plate. please refer to your machine’s programming manual and contact MTC Software. This has the same effect as arraying a row or column of parts. when repeating vertically nested parts (columns). One corner of the plate will be highlighted and will have two arrows coming out of it .representing the output axis. except that the CNC file is much smaller. Advanced: Since some details of step and repeat are machine specific. This screen shows a simplified view of a rectangular plate. Up. . Down When repeating horizontally nested parts (rows). Right. the output axis will remain the same.Output Axis The Output Axis settings page allows you to modify your nesting init point and to define the output axis that will be used to generate CNC files. Direction Repeated rows (or columns) will be offset in the direction selected here.

. The middle button will flip the output axis vertically. a single subroutine could be created. Click Default to restore the default output axis with +Y in the up direction and +X in the right direction. but rotate the axes 90 degrees clockwise. usually representing a profile or collection of profiles.Subroutines A subroutine is a basic program unit. The last button will flip the output axis horizontally. on a nest of 500 identical circles. If you need subroutine support. allow the use of subroutines to reduce CNC file size. . the arrow pointing up is labeled as the +Y axis and the arrow pointing right is labeled as the +X axis. Presenting this vertical plate correctly in ProNest would result in a much smaller view of the nest (because most monitors are wider than they are tall). Important: A specialized section in the post processor governs whether this settings page is available. rather than specifying the geometry for the circle 500 times.180 Example: With an init point in the lower-left corner. This section also controls the available choices for Type and Mode. These machines assume a lower-right init point. Certain types of machines. To change your output axis. which would then be called 500 times. primarily lasers. Note: Changes to the output axis will only affect CNC output. Notice that the output axis hasn't changed: up is still +Y and right is still +X. If the init point were then changed to the upper-left corner.. To provide the best view of the nest and to also allow for correct output you would select a lower left init point. this has the effect of changing the nest to one with a lower-right init point and with its long side on the right. During output. Example: With an init point in the lower-left corner. CNC Output . The first button will rotate the output axis clockwise by 90°. but as far as the machine is concerned this is the right-hand side of the plate. there would be a down arrow labeled as the -Y axis. Click the rotate button once and the up-arrow will become -X while the right-arrow changes to +Y. Usually this section is not used. the arrow pointing up is labeled as the +Y axis and the arrow pointing right is labeled as the +X axis. use the three buttons in the middle of the plate. For example. Changing the Output Axis Some machines have the plate loaded with the long side on the bottom. and whether or not Use rotation angle is active. Click the flip axis vertically button and the up-arrow will become +X while the right-arrow remains the same as +Y. contact MTC Software Inc. rather than the bottom.

. Choices:Always Absolute. Part Cluster. Same As Main Program Subroutines will be generated using the same mode as the main program. Part Each subroutine will represent a collection of profiles (a part). Profile Cluster. Part Cluster Explanation.181 Subroutine Settings Type Defines the type of subroutines that will be generated. Choices:(None). Optimized (None) No subroutines will be created. Profile Each subroutine will represent a single profile. Mode This setting defines the mode that will be used for generating the CNC code for the subroutines. Profile Cluster Explanation. Profile. Part. Always Incremental Subroutines will be generated in incremental mode. Optimized Explanation. Note: The rest of the settings on this page are activated only if Type is set to something other than (None). irrespective of the mode of the main program. Same as Main Program Always Absolute Subroutines will be generated in absolute mode. irrespective of the mode of the main program. Always Incremental.

Otherwise. it becomes more likely that subroutines can be reused. This setting is intended for machines with automatic plate handling systems. a different subroutine will be used for each unique rotation of the same geometry. These nest subroutines may be output into a single master CNC file. Allow nested subroutines Check this setting to allow one subroutine to call another subroutine. Tip: To edit or view the spreadsheet. Allow subroutined nests Select this setting to generate subroutines for each nest in the job.Microjoint / Plate Handler Important: A specialized section in the post processor governs whether this settings page is available. Important: This functionality is not currently implemented. If the avoidance motions are removed from consideration. Allow subroutines that contain only collision avoidance motions Select this setting if you are using collision avoidance and want separate profile subroutines generated that contain only the rapid traverses between profiles.182 Use rotation angle Select this setting to allow ProNest to use the same subroutine for similar geometry being output at different rotation angles. Settings Table This setting specifies which settings table is used for microjoints. Important: This functionality is not currently implemented. the collision avoidance motions will be contained within their respective part or profile subroutines. Not all machines have this capability. which contains all the XLS files found in the Microjoint spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Otherwise. Microjoint Settings Microjoints are machine-applied tabs. Usually this section is not used. A unique subroutine will be generated based on the total geometry of the part or profile .including the avoidance motions. contact MTC Software Inc. Settings in the settings table determine the size of the tab and the length of the tab lead-in. this would allow a part subroutine to be composed of calls to profile subroutines. CNC Output . For example. Note: This setting is intended to reduce the number of subroutines required. A place holder is inserted into the CNC code which the cutting machine translates into a tab when the CNC code is run. If you need microjoint and/or plate handler support. . click the Edit button. You can select any settings table from the list.

Note: The following two settings are active only if Use programmed microjoints is selected. When adding tabs manually in Advanced Edit. which contains all the XLS files found in the Plate Handler spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Changing the value of this setting does not affect parts that already have tabs (or don't have tabs). . Settings from the Microjoint settings table may be used by the machine to make this determination. Note: The Settings table setting is active only if Use plate handler is selected.183 Use programmed microjoints Select this setting if you want to be able to manually add microjoint tabs to profile geometry. Replace every lead-out with a microjoint Select this setting if you want to replace all profile lead-outs with microjoint tabs at output time. Use plate handler Select this setting if your machine is capable of using an automatic plate handler and you wish to make use of this feature. Plate Handler Settings An automatic plate handler is a mechanism provided by some machine manufacturers that enables the cutting machine to load its own plates as specified in the CNC code. Tip: To edit or view the spreadsheet. Important: The value of this setting is used only when tabs are added. Not all machines have this capability. you will be given the option of adding the tab as a microjoint instead of a normal tab. Use automatic microjoints Select this setting if you want the machine to automatically insert microjoints where the machine deems appropriate. click the Edit button. Settings table This setting specifies which settings table is used for the plate handler. You can select any settings table from the list. normal tabs will be added. Use microjoints during AutoTab Select this setting to have ProNest insert microjoint tab placeholders during the AutoTab process (instead of normal tabs). Otherwise.

Output sheets Select this setting to output the sheet geometry into the DXF file.184 CNC Output . Clear this setting to output DXF files as individual DXF entities (arcs and lines). the default CAD color will be used (this comes from either the post processor or the Process Parameters settings table). The DXF files produced during output should be readable by ProNest or any CAD system that understands DXF files. If this setting is cleared. Layer Names Output original layer names whenever possible Select this setting to output the original CAD layer names as the entity layer names in the DXF file. Each profile would be generated as a single polyline entity. It also controls which DXF Output settings are available. If you need DXF Output support. Output leads Select this setting to output existing lead-ins and lead-outs on profiles when outputting DXF files. Otherwise. leads are removed. Use quality to output CAD colors Select this setting to interpret the QUALITY attribute of arcs and lines as CAD colors. Important: A specialized section in the post processor governs whether this settings page is available. Some of the settings on this page allow this behavior to be overridden. contact MTC Software Inc. If the profile being output was not originally a CAD file. then the default layer information will be used (this comes from either the post processor or the Process Parameters settings table).DXF Output For DXF output. layer and color information is normally stored in the post processor or may be retrieved from Process Parameters (if process parameters are being used). Output safe zones Select this setting to output the safezone geometry into the DXF file. DXF Output Settings Output polylines Select this setting to output DXF files using polylines. Usually this section is not used. .

For a through description of this setting. They are repeated on the Interior Leads settings page. It is repeated on the Cutting Techniques settings page.185 Editing process settings Each process supported by the machine will have its own settings page directly under the Machine page. For a thorough description of this setting. For a thorough description of this setting. . Use default interior leads only Interior Leads These two settings are for cut processes only. see "AutoTab". In addition to the main settings page for each process. see "Cutting Techniques". For a thorough description of this setting. Expand each process item by clicking on the plus-sign . For a thorough description of this setting. Settings Tables Use default process parameters only Process Parameters These two settings are repeated on the Process Parameters settings page. They are repeated on the Exterior Leads settings page. Cutting Techniques This setting is for cut processes only. see "Process Parameters". Costing This setting is repeated on the Costing settings page. This will expand the tree-view to show the settings pages for a particular process. Use default exterior leads only Exterior Leads These two settings are for cut processes only. They are repeated on the AutoTab settings page. see "Interior/Exterior Leads". For a through description of this setting. Use default AutoTab settings only AutoTab These two settings are for cut processes only. see "Interior/Exterior Leads". see "Costing". cut and scribe processes will contain one or more settings pages.

000.0 in. Recommended Value: 0. Recommended Value: 0.part separation The minimum separation allowed between two nested parts. then Process Parameters will not be active. which contains all the XLS files found in the Process Parameters spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Units: Speed Range: 0.000. Default Settings Kerf width This defines the width of the torch./min Recommended Value: 100. With a proper kerf value. Units: Distance Range: 0.000. click the Edit button.0 in.0 to 10. This can be useful for parts that share a common line.0 in.0 to 100. Process Parameters This setting specifies which settings table is used for process parameters. . then the entire Default Settings section will be inactive.5 in.0 in.1 in. Tip: To edit or view the spreadsheet./min Part . ProNest can adjust a common line so that it doesn't infringe on either part. If this is cleared. Units: Distance Range: -10. Nested parts that are closer together will be shown in conflict.0 to 10. You can select any settings table from the list.186 Process Parameters Process Parameter Settings Use default process parameters only If this is selected. Feedrate Feed rate to use in CNC output and costing. because all process parameter settings will come from the Default Settings section. because all process parameter settings will come from the spreadsheet specified by Process Parameters.

then the entire Default Settings section will be inactive.0 in. which contains all the XLS files found in the Interior/Exterior Leads spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Recommended Value: 0. Units: Distance Range: 0. Part .0 to 100. Interior/Exterior Leads Settings Use default interior/exterior leads only If this is selected. because all lead settings will come from the spreadsheet specified by Interior/Exterior leads. Tip: To edit or view the spreadsheet. Interior/Exterior Leads This setting specifies which settings table is used for interior/exterior.part separation Pierce .0 in. Nested parts that are closer to the plate edge will be shown in conflict.0 to 100. Recommended Value: 0. because all lead settings will come from the Default Settings section. Nested parts that are closer to a pierce point will be shown in conflict. The following values are calculated and appear for information purposes only: Pierce . Units: Distance Range: 0. then Interior/Exterior leads will not be active.5 in.plate separation – Part to part separation Interior/Exterior Leads Each cut process has one settings page for interior leads and another for exterior leads.plate edge separation The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and a plate edge.5 in. If this is cleared.pierce separation) – Part . . click the Edit button.187 Part . You can select any settings table from the list.plate edge separation value = Part .pierce separation The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and the pierce point of another nested part.pierce separation + Part .pierce separation value = (2 * Part .

angle. Click the right-hand side of the Style row (where it shows the actual style used). 90. so a 90° leadin will cause a sharp left-turn into the first cut.0 to 360. so a 90° lead-out will cause a sharp left-turn out of the last cut. 180.0 in. Units: Degrees Range:0.0° Recommended Value:0. 2. Style The style of a lead defines its basic shape. for a lead-in. Recommended Value: 0. Spiral. Click OK. 3.0° for a side lead-out . Size specifies the length of the lead. A 0° lead-in will lead straight into the first cut. For the arc style. Click the down arrow and select a new style from the list. Lead-out angles are defined in a similar fashion with a 0° lead-out extending straight out of the last cut. for a lead-out Angle The angle of a lead-in is defined with respect to the first motion after the lead. Positive lead-out angles are defined counter-clockwise from the 0° position. Arc. and extension. Size controls the scale of the lead. For all other lead styles. Size For the linear style. A lead is defined by its style. Lock-9. Diagonal Step. Linear.0° for corner leads. Lead-outs also have an overtravel setting.5 in. 0. T-Lock Choices for Lead Out:(None). Choices for Lead In:(None). Arc. Units: Distance Range: 0. Linear To change a lead style: 1. Step. size.188 Default Settings Default lead settings can be specified for both corner and side leads. Positive lead-in angles are defined clockwise from the 0° position.0 to 100.25 in. Lock-7. These five aspects of a lead are defined here. Size specifies the radius of the arc.0° for a side lead-in.

0 in. Click the value (it’s a hyperlink). then the torch/head will travel past the start point before cutting the lead-out. Tip: To edit or view the spreadsheet. Type the slot tolerance in the box. Cutting techniques (table) This setting specifies which settings table is used for cutting techniques.0 to 100.0 in. Recommended Value: 0. Auto height control will be disabled for slots that are smaller in width than the value (referred to as Slot tolerance). Recommended Value: 0. If this value is positive (overtravel). Recommended Value:0. click the Edit button. Click OK. You can select any settings table from the list.0 to 10. 2. .0 in. Overtravel This value applies only to the lead-out. 3. If this value is negative (undertravel).0 in.0 in.0 to 100. which contains all the XLS files found in the Cutting Techniques spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). Units: Distance Range: 0.0 in.189 Extension The tip of the lead-in (or lead-out) will be extended by this distance. Units: Distance Range: -100. then the torch/head will begin cutting the lead-out before reaching the start point. Cutting Techniques Cutting Techniques Settings Disable auto height control for slots smaller than <value> in. Units: Distance Range:0. To edit the slot tolerance: 1.

An unlimited number of dissimilar parts can be used. user-defined region. Units: Distance Range: 0. ProNest handles five different methods of common line cutting: Important: The following methods of common line cutting use only pre-kerfed parts when creating the finished common line cut part. Pair Two parts are common line cut together.0 in. Common Line Cut Settings Minimum shared length The minimum length of a line that must overlap a line in another part for them to be considered "in common. A = CLC array. M = multi-part CLC. Consequently. maintaining proper kerf direction and original part geometry. Unless otherwise denoted. In the rare case that this would be required. The labels are: O = old pair CLC.190 Common Line Cut Common line cutting is a way of reducing the number of pierces and total cut length while maximizing the number of parts being cut. The plate edge may also be used as one of the common lines. P = pair CLC. Q = quad CLC. It is available only through the use of a special command line parameter that causes ProNest to use this method over the regular Pair method.0 in. the following settings are labeled according to which type of common line cutting they are used with. Recommended Value: 1. for assistance. Used For: All methods of common line cut . CLC Array Two or more of the same parts are cut in a series of rows and columns such that they fill a region up to the size of the plate the parts are being nested on or a smaller. Old Pair* Two parts are common line cut together. Kerf codes are present in the finished CLC profile. * The Old Pair method of common line cutting is in the process of being phased out." At least one such line must exist between two parts for those parts to be eligible for becoming a common line part. please contact MTC Software Inc. Advanced CLC Two or more parts are common line cut together.0 to 10000. Quad A part is common line cut with itself into a 2 x 2 grid. no kerf codes are present in the finished CLC profile.

. the lead-in will be shifted one kerf width "down" (toward the second part in the CLC pair). Additionally. Value 1 = Slowdown (% of feedrate) Units: Percentage Range: 0.0 to 10000. Choices:Crossing. Not Crossing Select this choice when it is not possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with oxyfuel cutting. Used For: Old Pair only To change either of these values: 1. Not Crossing Used For: All methods of common line cut Crossing Select this choice when it is possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with laser or plasma cutting. Edit the value and click OK.191 Torch path style There are two torch path styles available for common line cutting.0 in. Click on the underlined value (its a hyperlink) 2.0% Used For: Old Pair only Value 2 = Slowdown distance Units: Distance Range: 0. from completion of the first part <value1> represents a percentage of the normal cutting feed rate and <value2> represents a distance from the end of the common line at which to slow down to this percentage. Note: This setting is active only if Torch path style is set to Not Crossing.0 to 100. Slow down to <value1>% of feedrate <value2> in.

The value defines the maximum angle by which to rotate one part of a selected pair to line up common line cuttable entities.0 to 10000.192 Maximum area increase This setting is used only when a part is automatically common line cut with itself (like when a single nested part is selected and then the CLC button is clicked). Units: Distance Range:0. this value represents how far the geometry from the second part will be from the geometry of the first part in the finished common line part.0 in. no pair CLC part is created. If no entities may be lined up by rotating one of the selected pair of parts by up to this angle. For old pair CLC. The value defines the percentage by which it is allowable for the region of the finished pair CLC part to be bigger than the region of the original part. Units: Degrees Range:0 to 360° Recommended Value:45° Used For: Pair and Old Pair Use kerf width from process parameters Select this check box to use kerf values specified in your Process Parameters settings. Units: Percentage Range:0 to 1000% Recommended Value:150% Used For: Pair and Old Pair Maximum alignment rotation This setting is used only when a part is automatically common line cut with itself (like when a single nested part is selected and then the CLC button is clicked). Kerf width Amount by which to pre-kerf each part when creating the finished CLC part for every CLC method except old pair CLC. then the kerf width defined below is used. If this check box is cleared. Used For: All methods of common line cut .

Units: Screen pixels Range:0 to 100 Recommended Value:25 Used For: Pair and Old Pair Note: This tolerance is in screen pixels to allow you to control its accuracy by using an appropriate zoom level on the nest. this setting has a slightly different purpose. Select this check box to maintain the highest quality value belonging to either entity. two lines that are common line cut together will have different quality values. any tabs on that line are removed. Used For: Pair. Advanced CLC. a distance measured on your monitor will represent a larger real-world distance on your nest than if you were zoomed in. In this case. lines with tabs will be considered for the common line. then tabs will be maintained on all entities in the finished part except for the common line(s). the tolerance is also greater when you are zoomed out. and Old Pair When used for Pair (or Old Pair): Select this check box to disallow lines with tabs from being considered for the common line. . Advanced CLC. As a result.193 Do not try with lines that have tabs Depending on is use. If this checkbox is cleared. When used for Advanced CLC: Select this check box to remove all tabs from the finished CLC part. Clear this check box to maintain the lowest quality value. CLC Array. If this check box is cleared. Used For: Pair. Maintain highest quality on common lines Sometimes. When you are zoomed far out. if the end points of the common line in each part are closer together than this tolerance. if a tabbed line is chosen as the common line. those end points are lined up before creating the common line part. and Old Pair Tolerance (screen pixels) End point snap distance When creating a pair CLC part from two parts selected on the screen.

A negative extension will shorten the start of the profile and the pierce will occur on the plate. Cut towards the plate edge.Plate Edge Plate Edge Settings Allow common lines with the plate edge Select this check box if you wish to be able to place parts right on the plate edge and have the plate edge count as one or more sides of the part.0 in. Whatever the torch path direction is when first created is what gets used in the part. . would start right on the plate edge. the torch path direction already satisfies any of the cut direction choices. Cut away from the plate edge Default No modification to cut direction is made. Any part sides in common with the plate edge will not be cut.0 to 100. Cut towards the plate edge Any profile that starts at the plate edge will have its cut direction modified so that it will end at the plate edge. Units: Distance Range:-100.194 Common Line Cut . In these cases. Cut Direction This dictates the cut direction of profiles that are in common with the plate edge and. when no extension is specified. Choices:Default. no modification to torch path direction will be made. Extension Profiles cut in common with the plate edge can start outside (or inside) the plate. A positive extension will extend the start of the profile and the pierce will occur off the plate. Recommended Value:0.0 in. Cut away from the plate edge Any profile that ends at the plate edge will have its cut direction modified so that it will start cutting at the plate edge. A zero-length extension will case the pierce to occur on the plate edge. Note: In any case where a profile both starts and ends at a plate edge.

plasma. Units: Percentage Range:0 to 100% Recommended Value:50% Note: This setting is active only if Kerf crossing lead-outs is selected. Lead-out percentage If lead-outs are allowed to cross a previously cut kerf. Note: Most automatically generated CLC arrays will use Not Crossing as their torch path style. triangles. Choices:Crossing. Not Crossing Used For: All methods of common line cut Crossing Select this choice when it is possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with laser. Certain specific cases of parts (rectangles.Array CLC Array Settings Torch path style There are two torch path styles available for common line cutting. Kerf crossing lead-outs Select this setting to allow lead-outs to cross a previously cut kerf. This setting is repeated from the Common Line Cut page. . Not Crossing Select this choice when it is not possible for the machine to cut over a previously cut kerf width: such as with oxyfuel cutting. Insert stop codes Select this check box to insert a stop code at the end of each part so that is may be removed before cutting continues. Note: This setting is active only if Torch path style is set to Not Crossing. and parallelograms) may use either style. The length is defined as a percentage of the kerf width. trapezoids. then this setting defines the length of that lead-out. Note: This setting is active only if Torch path style is set to Not Crossing. or waterjet cutting.195 Common Line Cut .

Maximum height Defines the maximum allowable height of the finished CLC array (excluding lead-ins and lead-outs).0 in. Units: Distance Range:0. CLC arrays will partially fill this last column. If this check box is cleared.0 to 10000. the array could continue in a new column except that there aren't enough parts left to complete that column. Each cell in this grid is made from one base unit. Units: Distance Range:0. use interactive CLC array. CLC arrays will be created only with completely filled columns. Maximum number of units This setting limits the overall size of CLC arrays. Range:0 to 10000 Maximum columns Defines the maximum number of columns that a single CLC array part can have. for parallelograms a base unit requires two parts.0 in. They will not be built with more base units than this maximum.196 Array Size Limitations When a CLC array is created. such as rectangles. Units: Base units Range:0 to 10000 Maximum rows Defines the maximum number of rows that a single CLC array part can have. and for triangles a four part base unit is created. Often. Full columns only If this check box is selected. Range:0 to 10000 Maximum width Defines the maximum allowable width of the finished CLC array (excluding lead-ins and lead-outs). the end result is a grid of parts with a certain number of rows and columns. For some parts.0 to 10000. Tip: To preview the base unit before creating a CLC array. the base unit consists of one part. .

197 Common Line Cut . then safety cuts will be added only at intersection points with subsequent profiles.xls) Select this check box to retrieve the values for Length of safety cuts.Safety Cuts Safety cuts are added to common line cut parts to help avoid potential tip up situations as parts are cut out. see "Common Line Cut". Safety Cut Settings Use safety cuts Select this check box to allow safety cuts to be added to common line cut parts.0 to 100. Use values from Process Parameters (*. They also provide a way of piercing a user-specified distance away from a previously cut portion of the CLC part.0 in. as well as with subsequent profiles. Recommended Value:0. Offset for process-on. The General Tab Length of safety cuts Maximum length to use for safety cuts. They may not be selected or edited. If this check box is cleared. then these values will come from settings on this page. If this check box is cleared. and Offset for process-off from the Process Parameters XLS file. Add safety cuts at all intersections Select this check box to add safety cuts at intersection points within the profile being processed. For more information about common line cut methods. Important: Safety cuts will be added only during post processing so they will only be visible during cut simulation. . Safety cuts may not cross entity boundaries. Safety cuts may be used with all types of common line cutting except for parts paired with the "Old Pair" method. so it is possible to have shorter safety cuts created. Note: If a Process Parameters XLS is specified and a material match cannot be found. the values specified on this page will be used. Units: Distance Range:0.0 in. Note: The following settings are active only if Use safety cuts is selected.

Recommended Value:0. A positive value will cause the pierce to occur beyond the end of the safety cut. The End of Profiles Tab Add safety cuts to the end of profiles Select this setting to add safety cuts at the end of subsequent profiles.0 in. the torch may advance towards an existing safety cut. Units: Distance Range:-100. Note: This setting is active only if Add safety cuts to the end of profiles is selected . This has the effect of moving the final torch off of the subsequent profile by a length at least equal to the length of the safety cut. Units: Distance Range:-100.198 The Begin of Profiles Tab Add safety cuts to the beginning of profiles Select this setting to add safety cuts at the beginning of subsequent profiles. Note: This setting is active only if Add safety cuts to the beginning of profiles is selected.0 to 100. Recommended Value:0. A negative value will cause the pierce point to be within the safety cut. Offset for process-on Specifies the distance beyond the end of the safety cut at which to pierce. A zero value will pierce exactly at the end of the safety cut. This setting specifies a distance to stop cutting before the safety cut is reached.0 in.0 in.0 in.0 to 100. This has the effect of moving the initial pierce point of the subsequent profile by a length at least equal to the length of the safety cut. Offset for process-off When cutting a profile.

Recommended Value:0. Recommended Value:0.0 in. Disable auto height control Select this check box to turn off automatic height control when cutting a chain between parts.0 to 10000. The torch will remain on as it moves from the lead-out of one part to the lead-in of the next part. This yields a uniform array of parts. Units: Distance Range:0. each row or column will have its lead-in extended by this value. Units: Distance Range:0. Important: The way any chain controls auto height control is governed by this setting at the time the chain is created.0 in. Recommended Value:0.0 in. Chaining Settings Part-chain separation The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and a nested chain. If this setting is modified. it does result in a longer cut length. but with only one pierce per row or column (for the exterior profiles).199 The Advanced Tab Minimum profile length When applying safety cuts it is possible to end up with very short profiles.0 in.0 in. any profiles shorter than this value will be ignored. Units: Distance Range:0.0 to 10. Automatic height control will be re-enabled before cutting the next part in the chain. Parts closer than this distance to a chain will be shown in conflict. This setting allows you to specify how long these short profiles have to be for them to be cut. In effect. . existing chains are not modified to match. Lead-in extension When a chained array of parts is created.01 in. Chaining Chaining parts together allows multiple exterior profiles to be cut with a single pierce. While this reduces the number of pierces needed to cut the parts.0 to 10000. Chain Array Chain array creates a nested array of parts chained together either vertically or horizontally. not packed together as closely as with array or pattern array.

chain array will use the part's existing leads. Use ‘Not-Crossing’ lead-in/lead-out Select this check box to force chain array to modify the leads such that the kerf is not crossed within the part at the start point. they remain connected by thin webs of material (bridges). . Otherwise. Clear this check box if the chain should not be allowed to cross itself. Bridge radius Bridges can have a radius where they enter and leave each part.200 Allow cut to cross kerf Select this check box to allow chain arrays to be generated such that the chain coming from the lead-out of one part may cross the chain going toward the lead-in of another part. A zero value means that the torch will travel over the exact same bridge geometry twice: once going to the next part and once returning from it. but it does result in a longer cut length.0 to 5. Chain parts in reverse order Select this check box to allow chain arrays to be built from the end of each row or column back toward the beginning. effectively cutting the bridge. Recommended Value:0. Units: Distance Range:0.0 to 1. A negative value will invert the sides of the bridge. Cutting parts together in this way can reduce the number of pierces needed to cut the parts.0 in. Bridging Bridging parts together allows multiple exterior profiles to be cut with a minimal number of pierces.125 in.0 in.0 indicates that no radius should be used. A value of 0. Recommended Value:0. Bridging Settings Bridge width Specifies the width of the bridge between adjacent parts. Units: Distance Range:-5.125 in. A positive value will leave a thin web of material connecting the parts. This radius allows for a smoother transition from the part to the bridge. When bridged parts are cut.

Units: Screen pixels Range:0 to 100 Recommended Value:8 Note: This tolerance is in screen pixels to allow you to control its accuracy by using an appropriate zoom level on the nest. When you are zoomed far out. AutoTab AutoTab Settings Use default AutoTab settings only If this is selected. You can select any settings table from the list. angled cuts greater than this value will not be considered corners. . AutoTab This setting specifies which settings table is used for AutoTab. Allowing the bridge to snap to a corner can create smoother transitions from the part geometry to the bridge. then the entire Default AutoTab Settings section will be inactive. because all process parameter settings will come from the Default AutoTab Settings section. For the purposes of "snapping" to corners. Tip: To edit or view the spreadsheet.201 Maximum corner angle Since bridges will "snap" to corners. If this is cleared. the tolerance is also greater when you are zoomed out. this setting helps define exactly what a corner is. then AutoTab will not be active. Units: Degrees Range:0 to 360° Recommended Value:135° Tolerance (screen pixels) End point snap distance Maximum distance from a corner (see Maximum corner angle above) that a bridge start point can be which would cause it to snap to that corner. click the Edit button. As a result. because all process parameter settings will come from the spreadsheet specified by AutoTab. which contains all the XLS files found in the AutoTab spreadsheet settings folder (defined in Preferences). a distance measured on your monitor will represent a larger real-world distance on your nest than if you were zoomed in.

. Similarly. Units: Distance Range:0. Note: This setting is overridden if the default AutoTab strategy is set to Center of Line (see below). Units: Distance Range:0. Apply only to straight lines Select this setting to restrict AutoTab placement to linear motions only (no arcs). Tip: Giving this setting a non-zero value will help prevent tiny motions from being created. Recommended Value:0. if the tab would end within this distance from the end of the entity. Units: Distance Range:0. the tab start point will be shifted to the beginning of the entity.0 to 10.0 to 5.0 in.1 to 10000.0 in. This length represents the distance along the original part geometry that will remain uncut for each tab. No two tabs will be placed closer than this value along any profile perimeter.5 in.202 Snap tolerance If the location chosen as the start point of the tab is within this distance from the start point of the chosen entity. Tabs will also not be placed closer than this distance to the start or end point of the profile (the exception to this is the At Corners strategy). Recommended Value:1.0 in. Minimum spacing Defines the minimum amount of profile perimeter that should be cut between tabs. Default AutoTab Settings Tab length Length of each tab that will be added during AutoTab. This can be beneficial on some machines where tiny motions can be problematic. the tab will be shifted so that its end point coincides with the entity end point.0 in.

Number of Tabs AutoTab will attempt to add a user specified number of tabs to each profile. At Intervals. Number per profile Maximum number of tabs to add to each profile during AutoTab. At Corners (None) No tabs will be added during AutoTab. During AutoTab.203 Strategy Determines which AutoTab strategy will be employed. Click the value (it’s a hyperlink). To edit the Minimum line size value: 1. Due to profile perimeter length and other factors. lines shorter than distance will be ignored. Range:0 to 100 At Intervals AutoTab will attempt to add tabs at a user specified interval around the perimeter of each profile. Number of Tabs. Specify the Minimum line size and click OK.0 in.0 in. Choices:(None).0 to 10000. Recommended Value:5. Do not consider lines smaller than <value> in. 2. . Units: Distance Range:0. Center of Line. Center of Line AutoTab will attempt to place tabs only at the center point of lines greater than a specified length. the number of tabs added may be smaller than the amount specified with this setting.

1 to 10000. Both sides of corner Shortest side of corner A tab will be added to the shorter of the two entities that form each corner. At Corners AutoTab will attempt to place tabs to either side of each corner in each profile.0 to 10000. Maximum corner angle When placing tabs at corners. Longest side of corner A tab will be added to the longer of the two entities that form each corner. Units: Degrees Range:0 to 180° Recommended Value:90° Tab location This setting describes where tabs will be placed relative to each corner. This also represents the minimum distance from the start point to the first tab. Longest side of corner. Cut angles that are greater than this value will not be considered a corner for the purposes of placing tabs. A zero-value will add tabs that start or end at the corner. Distance from corner Minimum distance from each corner that a tab will start or end. depending on which side of a corner it is being added to. Both sides of corner A tab will be added to both entities that form each corner. Choices:Shortest side of corner.0 in. Important: This value should never be shorter than the Minimum spacing. it is important to define exatly what a "corner" is.204 Distance between tabs Minimum distance between consecutive tabs. Units: Distance Range:0.0 in. . Units: Distance Range:0.

205 Immediately after start point Select this check box to add a tab immediately after the start point of each profile. tabs will be added only at true corners. Otherwise. tabs will be added only at true corners. . Immediately before end point Select this check box to add a tab immediately before the end point of each profile. Otherwise.

(Yellow Icon) By default..206 Chapter 8: AutoNesting Start AutoNest.nest only on existing nests. Current Nest. Strategies 1-10 may be given more descriptive names as part of the process of editing your strategy settings. How should ProNest create new nests? During AutoNesting. If the ‘Do not create new nest’ radio button is checked. Material.. the Plate List appears. or opening a Job). Use plates from the plate list – all new nests will be created from available plates in the Plate List. From there.. Whenever a Machine’s settings are loaded (either by selecting a new machine. Size. the New Nest selection will be removed. They may include the following: Rectangular.. This contains an image of the current plate from the list. The following selections define how new nests are created: • • • Do not create new nests . Use a custom plate – all new nests have the attributes of the defined custom plate. Begin nesting on There are 3 choices available in this drop-down list: First Nest. Use plates from the plate list When ‘Use plates from the plate list’ is checked. ProNest can create new nests as needed. New Nest. Start AutoNest. plus the following information: Name. and Strategy 110. Rectangular Optimization. will open the AutoNest Setup dialog. AutoNest Setup This dialog provides access to the AutoNest Setup values. the AutoNest Setup values are reset to match the Machine’s settings. These values are used whenever AutoNesting is performed. all plates in the list can be viewed. AutoNest Settings Strategy The strategies available in this drop-down list are limited to those that are authorized. you can edit your AutoNest Setup values and start or cancel AutoNesting. Using the navigator. this command exists only under the Nest menu item. .

. The actual spacing used is calculated by ProNest. This contains an image of the custom plate. you may either nest on the default remnant that is displayed in the Preview window or you may define a remnant of your own by clicking on the “Define Remnant” button. a part’s available quantity dips below Number of torches. The number of torches used will almost always equal Number of torches. During AutoNesting. To define a circular custom plate. For example. You will then be able to specify the geometry of the remnant you wish to nest on. Torch settings Note: The following fields will be inactive if the number of torches in the torches section under settings is not greater than one. then a custom plate with a quantity set to 10 would make available ten custom plates for each material. Number of torches During AutoNesting. Three types of custom plates can be defined: Rectangular. the number of torches used will not exceed this number. If. To define a rectangular custom plate. Then 1 Variable Torch spacing type There are 3 choices available in this drop-down list: Equal The spacing between torches will be equally spaced. if the Part List contained two parts of different materials. Circular. ProNest will determine the best number of torches to use. the Preview appears.207 Use a custom plate When ‘Use a custom plate’ is checked. specify a length and a width – or select one of the standard plate sizes. The number of torches used will never exceed Number of torches. Torch selection There are 3 choices available in this drop-down list: Fixed The number of torches used will always equal Number of torches. Fixed. the remaining parts are not nested. and Remnant. a part’s available quantity dips below Number of torches. during AutoNesting. If. The quantity of a custom plate controls the available quantity for each material needed. specify the diameter. The safe zone scheme of a custom plate will be applied to every new nest created during AutoNesting. This item is available only if it is authorized. If you select “Remnant” from the drop down list. the remaining parts are nested using one torch. during AutoNesting.

This item is available only if it is authorized. Changing this value will affect the entire selection. Start AutoNest will begin AutoNesting immediately. then this value will be blank. . then this value will be blank. this value defines the spacing between torches. they can all be reset together by clicking the Default button. Default Most of the AutoNest Setup values can be reset to their defaults as defined in the Machine’s settings. from the pop-up menu. AutoNesting will use the Machine’s default plate. Number of torches Displays the number of torches used for the entire selection. Start AutoNest (Green Icon) By default. If the selection contains parts with different torches. Changes to settings in the AutoNest Setup dialog have no effect on the Machine’s settings. right click on one of the selected parts and select Properties. Changing this value will affect the entire selection. then AutoNesting will use the Plate List.. This dialog contains editable properties. The spacing between torches will be calculated so that the parts can be placed as close together as possible. Cancel Clicking on the Cancel button will discard any changes to the AutoNest Setup values and cancel AutoNesting. this command exists only in the Nest toolbar.. It uses the current AutoNest Setup values with one exception. If the selection contains parts with different torch spacings. Part Properties (for all selected parts) To view the properties for all selected parts. Clicking OK will also cause ProNest to remember the AutoNest Setup values for future use. Torch spacing If Torch spacing type is Fixed. OK When the values defined in the AutoNest Setup dialog are correct. If changes are made to the values in the AutoNest Setup dialog.208 Fixed Variable The spacing between torches will be fixed at some userdefined spacing. clicking the OK button will begin AutoNesting. Otherwise. Torch spacing Displays the torch spacing used for the entire selection. If a Plate List has at least one plate available.

Editable. right click on the part and select Properties for [part name]. Read-only. Displays the selected part’s material. Read-only. Displays the selected part’s reference. Displays the y-axis offset of the selected part. Displays the available quantity of the selected part. Y Offset Angle Number of torches Torch spacing OK Part Properties (for one part in the Part List) To view the properties for a particular part in the Part List. If the selected part has more than 1 torch. part...209 OK Applies any changes to the properties and exits the dialog. Read-only. Read-only. from the pop-up menu. Editable. Displays the rotation angle of the selected part. Displays the torch spacing used for the selected part. Size Material Priority Allow Pattern Array Required Nested Available Reference Due Date Customer Remarks Read-only. This dialog contains read-only properties. . If the selected part has more than 1 torch. Displays the x-axis offset of the selected part. Part Properties (for one selected part) To view the properties for a particular selected part. Displays the required quantity of the selected Read-only. Displays the selected part’s priority. Read-only. Displays whether the part is eligible for pattern arraying. Cancel Discards any changes to the properties and exits the dialog. the offset displayed represents the offset of the master part. Closes the dialog. This dialog contains some editable properties. Read-only. from the pop-up menu. right click on the part in the Part List and select Properties for [part name]. Displays the number of torches used for the selected part. Displays the rectangular dimensions of the selected part. Size X Offset Displays the rectangular dimensions of the selected part. Editable. Displays the selected part’s remarks.. the offset displayed represents the offset of the master part. Displays the nested quantity of the selected part.. Displays the selected part’s due date. Displays the customer associated with the selected part.

Applies any changes to the properties and exits the dialog. . priority.210 Misc 1-3 OK Cancel Read-only. Note: Most of the categories in the left column above (material.) can be entered in the part record under part list in the Add Parts screen. etc. Discards any changes to the properties and exits the dialog. Displays miscellaneous information for the selected part.

Thickness. see the XLS Tables Overview section.25” material . uncheck the Use default process parameters only checkbox. Default settings can be set for Kerf width. if the material thickness required is 0. Default Process Parameters Default process parameters reside on the Process Parameters settings screen for a given process. Any name can be used for this key. Process parameters can be specified in two ways . The File | Preferences | Settings | Use Microsoft Excel to edit spreadsheet contents checkbox determines which editor is used. Condition. Plate Sep and Pierce Sep. Default process parameter settings for each process reside on that process’ Process Parameters settings screen. a column header row number cell located at B1. First. For instance. Quality. profile types. the record with the closest material thickness less than or equal to the required material thickness is selected. For further information about XLS table formats see the discussion of the General XLS Table Format in the XLS Table Overview section. XLS tables can be edited using the XLS Editor or using a spreadsheet editor such as Microsoft Excel. and a record exists with 0. This name must exactly match the name of the material selected when a part or plate is loaded. User defined process parameters may be added to the XLS table as defined in a later section. the process parameters XLS table has a units cell located at A1. choose a process parameters XLS table from the Process Parameters drop down box. Profile Area. An exact match is not required to match this key. Like all XLS tables. Note that Pierce-pierce separation and Pierceplate edge separation are calculated from the other separation values and may not be set.by using process parameters XLS tables or by using default process parameter settings. Examples of valid Material data include A36 and Mild Steel. cut qualities and cut conditions. selecting a process. costing and nesting. If an exact match is not found and a record exists with a 0. a column header located in the row specified by the column header row number and rows of data below the column header. For a general discussion of XLS tables. The standard column-headings in a process parameters XLS table are Material.5” material thickness. select a process. thickness ranges. profile areas.211 Chapter 9: Process Parameters Process parameters are process and material specific settings used in CNC output. Profile Type. If more than one record match is found. Next. Kerf. Part Sep. Finally. Part-part separation.5”. Thickness is a required key denoting the thickness of the material used. it is selected. then selecting Process Parameters from the processes’ tree view. Feedrate. Dynamic Pierce. Edit the XLS table by clicking on the icon to the right of the Process Parameters drop down box. Material is a required key denoting the name of the material used. and select Process Parameters from the processes’ tree view. A material thickness range is used as follows. which can be reached by going to File | Settings | Machine. Part-plate edge separation. To use default parameters check the Use default process parameters only checkbox. Process parameters XLS tables are spreadsheets containing settings for different materials. A match is found if a record contains a thickness less than or equal to the required material thickness. Process Parameters XLS Table Using settings from a process parameters XLS table requires three steps. An exact match of this key is required to select a record. go to File | Settings | Processes and Layers. and Part-pierce separation. Feedrate.

Dynamic Pierce gives the number of times to cut a lead-in extension. Representation of profile type is summarized in the table below. exterior or open. interior and exterior are represented together as I. This is only used in conjunction with cutting techniques. the record with the closest profile area greater than or equal to the required profile area is selected. Combinations are represented by listing them separated by commas.25” material thickness is selected. a record is selected if it contains a profile area greater than or equal to that required. Exterior and Open Crop Vaporize Skeleton Cutup (All) Skeleton Cutup (Exterior) Skeleton Cutup (Interior) Representation I E O I. Column-heading Material Key type Required Description Material name. An exact match is required for this key. If this key is used. Condition is an optional key denoting a cut condition. Pierce Sep is the minimum separation allowed between a nested part and the pierce point of another nested part.E. Part Sep is the minimum separation allowed between two nested parts. The following column-headings are not keys.E. Profile Type(s) Interior Exterior Open Interior and Open Interior. The standard column-headings are summarized in the following table.125” material thickness.212 thickness. It must be a whole number greater than -1. An exact match is required for this key. Profile Type is an optional key denoting the type of a given profile – interior. but are the standard process parameters settings. the record with 0. Thickness Required Material thickness.25” material thickness. it is selected. Plate Sep is the minimum separation allowed between a nested part and the plate edge. If this key is used. Profile Area is an optional key denoting the area of a given profile. Kerf is the cut compensation value to use in CNC output and pre-kerfing. which can be specified through the CAD file BOM or in advanced edit. Profile types are represented in the XLS by using the first letter of their name – I for interior. a record is selected if it contains a profile type equal to that required. For example.O C V S X N Quality is an optional key denoting cut quality. Must be identical to required material name for the record to match. If two records exist. one with a 0. If more than one record match is found. Must be less than or equal to the required material thickness for the . E for exterior and O for open. Feedrate is the feed rate to use in CNC output and costing.O I. and another with a 0.

C. Must be identical to the required cut condition for the record to match. X. The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and the pierce point of another nested part. This is resolved by using the maximum value for each separation for all of the processes. O. or listed combinations such as I. Must be greater than or equal to the required profile area for the record to match. Feed rate to use in CNC output and costing. Plate and Pierce Separations with Multiple Processes When using a single process on a nest. and N.E. E. The number of times to cut a leadin extension. Pierce Sep Using Part. whether default or in an XLS table. Must contain the profile type for the area to match. Kerf Feedrate Dynamic Pierce Part Sep Plate Sep Kerf width to use in CNC output and pre-kerfing. the . V. Allowed values are whole number greater than -1. Quality Optional Cut quality. Allowed values are user-defined strings. can be strictly observed. exterior or open. However. Profile Area Optional The area of the profile. the part-part. Profile Type Optional The type of the profile – interior. Used with cutting techniques. S. when more than one process appears on the nest. Allowed values are I.213 record to match. part-plate and part-pierce separations for the process. The minimum separation allowed between two nested parts. when multiple processes are used on a given nest they may have different separation values. Condition Optional Cut condition. Must be identical to the required quantity for the record to match. Therefore. The minimum separation allowed between a nested part and a plate edge.

the default process parameters settings are used. XLS tables provide the flexibility needed to handle process specific settings required to work with multiple process nests. or record. This parameter can then be used in any format section of the CFF and can be output to the CNC file or used in calculations or evaluations. Part Sep. including part. These factors can be combined to provide for very specific parameters to use in each of a wide array of cutting conditions. process parameters can be added to the process parameter XLS table and used for CNC output. To add a user defined process parameter. Using a Process Parameters XLS Table vs. avoiding the need to have a record for each material thickness. Pierce Sep. process parameters XLS tables allow tremendous control over the parameters used to nest. Kerf. quality and types such as interior vs. If no record is found. Note that this comes at the expense of efficient material usage.214 separations used will be those that lead to the greatest distance between parts. Units Conversion Units conversion is done on the following columns: Thickness. . Feedrate. and Condition may be used to further specify a group of settings to use. Therefore. Care should be taken to balance the needs of mixed process cutting and plate utilization. For a more detailed discussion of record matching see Record Matching in the XLS Table Overview section. exterior. To use this parameter in CNC output. in a process parameters XLS table contains a complete set of process parameters settings values. This allows different feed rates and kerfs to be used in CNC output and costing for profiles of varying areas. Note that user defined process parameters are only used for CNC output and not for nesting or costing. Wildcards can also be used to prevent a proliferation of records caused by the use of many optional keys. Contact MTC technical support for more information. Units conversion is not done on user defined process parameters. Using Default Process Parameters Process parameters XLS tables offer a powerful and flexible way to use settings specific to a given material and process. User Defined Process Parameters In addition to the standard process parameters described above. factors such as Profile Type. Saving Information in the Job Process parameters XLS table information is not saved to or restored from jobs. data type and default value to the [USER DEFINED VARIABLES] section of the CFF used by the desired machine. Settings can be defined for ranges of material thickness. Record Matching Each row. add the name. Plate Sep. and enter data into the process parameters records. for a given instance of use. Default process parameter information for each process is saved to and restored from jobs. plate and pierce separations. In addition. User defined process parameters can be added to the tables to meet CNC file output requirements. Enter a name in the column header row. Profile Area. pierces and plate edge and that preserve the minimum separation requirements of all processes. Quality. a single row or record must be selected by matching the combination of required and optional keys. cut and cost parts. edit the XLS table using the XLS Editor or Microsoft Excel and add a new column. Combined with cutting conditions. Conversion is not done on user defined process parameters.

Check CAD import layers to make sure the layers are mapping to the correct process. . check the separations for all the processes. Profile Area and Quality. • • • What if one of my keys is ignored? Make sure the column-heading of the key is spelled correctly. Check record match. Make sure the CFF is properly set up to output the user defined process parameters. even if I don’t have it checked? • No matching record is found. What if I don’t get process parameters in CNC output? • • • Go to File | Settings | CNC Settings and make sure Use machine parameters in output is checked. Thickness. 7. Another way to do this is to advanced edit the part and check the cut process for the profile in question. If using default process parameters. If the ignored key is quality.215 Troubleshooting 1. Make sure the name in the XLS table column header matches that in the CFF. What if I’m getting the wrong process parameters in output? • Process parameters for the wrong process may be in use. Profile Type. • • What if my process parameters are coming out in the wrong place in output? Check the CFF for proper formatting of CNC output. Make sure the correct XLS table record is being matched by checking the keys used (Material. 6. What if I always get default process parameters. The largest separations are used. 2. If multiple processes are used for the same material. Check the CFF to make sure it is set up to output process parameters. make sure the default feed rate and kerf values are not zero. What if I’m not getting user defined process parameters in output? • • • Make sure the proper XLS table is being used. What if I’m getting incorrect separations? • • • Check column header spellings. go into advanced edit and check the quality value for the profile in question.) • 3.

lead style settings. interior and exterior lead styles. This reduces the need to maintain duplicate copies of a table if the same settings are to be used for different processes. In certain XLS table types. Since each XLS table is designed to contain settings for all materials to be used with a given process. an XLS table of each type – process parameters. lead style settings.216 Chapter 10: XLS Table Overview XLS tables allow the use of process and material specific settings. costing and cutting techniques – should be assigned to each process. it must be the correct type for the desired usage. it is possible to define settings dependent on additional factors such as cut quality. Sharing XLS Tables Each XLS table represents the settings for different material types and thickness ranges for a single process. When an XLS table is assigned to a process. Cutting techniques tables contain specifications for things like radius and corner ramp downs. Costing settings tables contain information used to calculate production time and cost. Using XLS Tables To use XLS file settings. Lead style settings tables contain descriptions of lead styles to be applied to parts when they are loaded. This makes it easier to manage multiple tables of a given type and to select the correct type of XLS table for a given process and usage. These tables are spreadsheets and can be created and edited with the XLS Editor or with a spreadsheet application such as Microsoft Excel. See the individual table type sections for further information. and data can be modified in the individual cells. Editing XLS Tables XLS tables can be edited using the XLS Editor or using a spreadsheet editor such as Microsoft Excel. Note that each type of XLS table resides in a different folder. . costing settings and cutting techniques. the process parameters table for example. the same XLS table may be used for multiple processes within a given machine. If default settings are currently in use. profile type and profile area. and represents settings for the different material types and thickness ranges to be used with that process. Autotab tables contain descriptions of automatic tabbing strategies to be applied to parts when they are loaded or when they are manually autotabbed. XLS tables can be shared between processes when it makes sense to do so. Each XLS table can be used with one or more processes. costing settings and cutting techniques. XLS Table Types There are four XLS table types: process parameters. XLS files reside in user defined locations that are set by going to File | Preferences | Settings. Edit an XLS table by clicking on the edit icon to the right of its drop down box. However. The File | Preferences | Settings | Use Microsoft Excel to edit spreadsheet contents checkbox determines which editor is used. However. Rows can be added or removed. Choose XLS tables from the drop down boxes. An individual row of an XLS table contains settings for a given range of material thicknesses. or for multiple processes across different machines.process parameters. There are four types of XLS tables . Process parameters tables contain information such as feed rate and kerf width used in CNC file output and costing. go to File | Settings | Machine and select a process. New columns may also be added to certain table types. this box will be inactive.

The row number of the required column header is located in cell B1. if the table is in mm but the CNC output is required in inch. The required row of column-headings. be sure to save the table in Microsoft Excel Workbook format. Column header names such as Material and Thickness should not be modified because the application looks for specific column header names when matching records and loading data. a column header row cell. Column header row cell Column header Data row(s) Record Matching Each row. the column header should not be modified because the application expects this data to exist in a specific format and context. If using the Save As feature. Each cell of this row contains the name of the data stored in that column. One or more rows of settings data. However. Rows may be added or removed and the data may be modified. Value in cell B1 that specifies the row of the required column header. immediately below the column header. For instance. If this cell is blank. Allowed values are inch and mm. The units cell is located in the upper left hand corner of the table in cell A1 and specifies the units used in the table. Allowed values are whole numbers greater than or equal to 2. The column header resides in the row specified by the column header row number in cell B1. the column-heading name Material specifies a column containing the names of different materials. columns may be moved to improve readability of the table. and specifies the row number of the required column header. Also. inch is assumed. in an XLS table contains a complete set of settings values. This can be modified if rows of information must be added above the required column header. Format Item Units cell Description Value in cell A1 that specifies the table’s units. Modifying the information in this row may lead to the inability to use information from an XLS table. a column header. See individual table type sections for further information. The proper type of data must be entered into each cell. just to the right of the units cell. a value of 2 is assumed. and rows of data. The rows of settings data begin immediately below the column header. which contains column-heading names such as Material and Thickness. and alphanumeric data should be entered into the Material column. Therefore. Allowed values vary between columns. for a given instance of use. a single row or record must be selected by using . These values should not be changed. Allowed values for this cell are inch and mm. General XLS Table Format XLS tables have a required format consisting of four components: a units cell. In general. numeric data should be entered in the Thickness column. If this cell is blank. The XLS table required format is summarized in the table below. for certain XLS table types columns may be added or removed. or record. For instance. for things such as translated column-headings.) See the Units Conversion section below for further information. Note that only certain table values will be converted between different units if required (for instance.217 Table cells are not required to be formatted in any particular way.

If this key is used. and then choosing the row whose data mostly closely matches that of the keys. Any name can be used for this key. Profile Type(s) Interior Exterior Open Crop Vaporize Skeleton Cutup (All) Skeleton Cutup (Exterior) Representation I E O C V S X . Profile Type Optional Keys Profile Area. a record is selected if it contains a profile type equal to that required. Combinations are represented by listing them separated by commas. if the material thickness required is 0. An exact match of this key is required to select a record. Profile Type. Profile types are represented in the XLS by using the first letter of their name – I for interior. Condition Profile Area Material and Thickness are required keys for all XLS table types and must appear in the XLS table. Thickness is a required key denoting the thickness of the material used.E. interior and exterior are represented together as I. Examples of valid Material data include A36 and Mild Steel.5”. If an exact match is not found and a record exists with a 0. match the names as you have them defined in the material database.125” material thickness. For example. Every XLS table type has required keys. Quality. Thickness Material. E for exterior and O for open. Note: When entering the material names. Thickness Material. exterior or open. Material is a required key denoting the name of the material used. A match is found if a record contains a thickness less than or equal to the required material thickness.5” material thickness. it is selected.218 some criteria. Profile Area is an optional key denoting the area of a given profile. it is selected. On the other hand. If more than one record match is found. and some have optional keys. An exact match is not required to match this key. Thickness Profile Area. The name of each key exactly matches the name of a specific column-heading in an XLS table. the record with the closest material thickness less than or equal to the required material thickness is selected. If more than one record match is found. and will only be used in record selection if they exist. We do this by using a set of keys. and another with a 0. For instance. optional keys need not appear in the table. a record is selected if it contains a profile area greater than or equal to that required. Thickness Material. If two records exist. Representation of profile type is summarized in the table below.25” material thickness. the record with 0. Table Type Process Parameters Lead Styles Costing Cutting Techniques Required Keys Material.25” material thickness is selected. These are summarized in the following table. A range of material thickness is used as follows.25” material thickness. the record with the closest profile area greater than or equal to the required profile area is selected. and a record exists with 0. If this key is used. one with a 0. Profile Type is an optional key denoting the type of a given profile – interior.

since process parameters. Doing this is similar to using default values in the Process Settings screens. Using Wildcards The ‘*’ can be used as a wildcard for any required or optional key. This is only used in conjunction with cutting techniques. For example.219 Skeleton Cutup (Interior) Interior and Open Interior. adding a record that contains a wildcard for every key will ensure a record match in every instance. Profile Area Thickness. Profile Area. Default Records Default records can be defined using wildcards to ensure a record match for any combination of required and optional keys and to avoid having to add numerous records to cover every combination of keys. Condition is an optional key denoting a cut condition.O I. which can be specified through the CAD file BOM or in advanced edit. Corner Out Scale. An exact match is required for this key. Side Out Overtravel Thickness Thickness. Parts that were saved in the job will . Pierce Sep. When a job is loaded. the advantage of using a default record to accomplish this is that the default values reside in the XLS table. which makes setting default values seamless when changing which XLS table the process uses. An exact match is required for this key. In the simple case. and the required material is A36. if ‘*’ is used in the Material column of a given record. Profile Area Costing Cutting Techniques Saving Information in the Job XLS table information is not saved in the job. Corner Out Overtravel. Kerf. the current settings in the XLS tables are used. Side In Scale. This is by design. It must be a whole number greater than -1.E. However. not those that existed when the job was saved. cutting techniques and costing should reflect the latest changes to process and material specific settings. Plate Sep. and can help avoid having to add numerous rows to an XLS table to cover every possible case. Corner In Extension. Units Conversion Units conversion is only done on certain XLS table columns as summarized below: Table Type Process Parameters Lead Styles Columns Converted Thickness. Side Out Scale. This is especially true when using multiple optional keys such as Profile Type. and will match any value if no other record is matched. Corner Out Extension.O Quality is an optional key denoting cut quality. Corner In Scale. the record containing the ‘*’ will match unless another record exists that contains a Material value of A36. Side In Extension. Part Sep. Wildcards can be used for any key regardless of its data type. Side Out Extension. Feedrate. Using wildcards is a good way to designate default conditions for keys. Quality and Condition. Exterior and Open N I.

different kerfs and feed rates can be output in the CNC file based on profile area. or an error will be generated. default values from the Process Settings will be used for table types that have them. the spelling and punctuation of each name must be identical between the records of the XLS table and the Database material. There are disadvantages to using XLS tables. First. and different cutting techniques can be applied to interior and exterior profiles.220 retain their original lead styles. avoiding the need to have a record for each material thickness. factors such as Profile Type. and process. however. Using wildcards helps to mitigate this. This can be calculated as follows: (Number of possible values of Key1) * (Number of possible values of Key2) *… * (Number of possible values of Keyn) For example. or that appropriate default records are defined. thickness. Finally. the total number of records required if a unique set of settings is desired for each case is 2 * 5 * 3 = 30 records. five thickness ranges for each and all three profile types are used. Profile Area. settings can be defined for ranges of material thickness. and Profile Type – and there are two material types. each key used dramatically increases the number of records required. the material name of an XLS table record must exactly match that of the ProNest Database material table record that was used when a given part or plate was loaded. If a record match is not found in an XLS table. or cut quality. if three keys are used . The Advantages and Disadvantages of Using XLS Tables XLS tables provide a powerful and flexible way to use settings specific to a given material and process. It is easy to see how an explosion of records can occur when optional keys are used. In addition. In addition. . or no record will be matched in the XLS table. and Condition may be used to further specify a group of settings to use. different lead styles can be applied to parts as they are loaded based on material. Another difficult issue is record matching. Quality. but new parts loaded will reflect the current lead style settings. Thickness.Material. Care must be taken to ensure that each XLS table contains records that cover all combinations of keys that are required by the application. Although case and white space are not considered. In a single job. profile type.

or outside diameter of the material. Remember. the default. click on the Settings… button to view default values used by Pipe. This dimension option determines whether diameters and rectangular dimensions are calculated from the center line. If this box is selected. Pipe will assume that the sheet is laying with the outside up. it will make a difference if you have included punch marks on your parts as to which side is up. or outside diameter of the material. the inside up [outside down]. Tee Options Measure Dimensions From . inside.221 Chapter 11: Pipe Settings and Fitting Descriptions Pipe Settings When a Pipe fitting is selected and the shape reference screen is showing. Pipe WILL PUNCH on the OUTSIDE. You can specify if the sheet of material is laying with the outside up or. inside. Dimension Options Measure Dimensions From Outside Up Development The dimension option determines whether diameters and rectangular dimensions are calculated from the center line.

Choices are Quarter. This is measurement for how often the bends used to form parts will be ‘marked’. In general. Width of the plate. (Pre-Nested) Default thickness of the material. You can input the size of the mark here or leave at 0 for no marks. Bend allows material to be marked for bending.222 Tee Joint Location Material Thickness 2 Stitch Tee Size Determines the way the tee fits up with the hole. 4 Stitch Tee Size Stitch Leadin Length Bend/Quarter Marks Type Style Mark Size Bend Frequency Default Values Top Lap Bottom Lap Left Lap Right Lap Max Segment Size Kerf Width Stitch Width Material Thickness Plate X Plate Y Line To Arc Options Convert lines to arcs . The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part. Quarter marks are used when aligning pipe transitions that must be welded together. The width of the stitch cut when cutting the off-set as a single piece. etc. Circle. Notch. segmented curves into arcs. This value represents the minimum diameter hole that would have 4 stitches. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part. The desired length of the stitch leadin. Marks are used when aligning pipe transitions that must be welded together. at every other bend line. The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature The width of the torch. measured in inches. The thickness of the material measured in inches or millimeters. Punch or Scribe are your options for type of mark. This value represents the minimum diameter hole that would have 2 stitches. Quarter marks are a small deviation in the motion of the torch. “2”. Slot. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part. Pipe will attempt to convert developed. this will result in smaller files and a smoother cut. The mark can either be done with the torch or scribed with a marking tool. Anything smaller would have either 2 stitches or none. If selected. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part. Anything less would not have stitches. A “1” indicates a mark at every bend line. Bend or None. This is used to determine the proper part separation so the common line in prenested parts does not infringe on either part. Dwell. This is a choice list. Length of the plate.

Pipe will automatically turn as many line segments as it can into a single arc when viable. For instance. all curvatures will be developed as small straight lines. the curve using 1 inch as maximum segment size will be smoother than the same curve using 4 inches as the maximum segment size. If this value is set to 0. Parts with higher numbers generally have developed curves that are less "smooth" than those with smaller numbers. Offset Cone Max Segment Size The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature. The maximum allowable distance from the developed curve that arcs can be in order to replace line segments. Replacing the lines of a developed curve smooths the curve and creates smaller CNC files but if the arc tolerance is too large.223 Maximum Radius Some CNC Controllers have limitations as to the size of an arc motion they can handle. More segments . Activating the Line to Arc option. accuracy will be diminished. The curve with 1 inch segments will have 4 times the number of points as the one using 4 inch segments. Note: Leadin/Leadout values can be set for both exterior and interior profiles after the fill in parameters. You may specify a maximum arc radius if your controller is limited to a certain size. Arc Tolerance Fitting Descriptions The remainder of this section provides a description of each part along with the necessary fill-in parameters.

and outside the top of the cone. Number of pieces to make the offset cone. if ‘Measure inside base. negative X is to the right. (Optional) If the top of the cone is tilted. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part. positive Y is up and negative Y is down. The tilt angle for the top of the cone. Cone Top Diameter Cone Base Diameter Cone Height Cone X Offset The diameter of the cone top.224 yield a smoother curve. specify the rotation the tilt should be at in relation to the seam of the cone. The tilt angle for the base of the cone. the part will be measured as designated in the settings. Looking at the plan view. This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top. Cone Y Offset Base Tilt Angle Base Rotation Angle Top Tilt Angle Top Rotation Angle Left Hand Side Lap Right Hand Side Lap Top Side Lap Bottom Side Lap Weld Gap Top Collar Bottom Collar Number of Pieces Inside Base / Outside Top Dimensions . It has the same diameter as the top of the cone. If ‘NO’ is selected. but also produce a larger file. Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds. specify what rotation the tilt should be at in relation to the seam of the cone. the part will be measured from inside the base of the part.this field is not required to create the offset cone) If the base of the cone is tilted. Looking at the plan view. outside top dims’ is selected. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part. This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the bottom. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part. positive X is to the left. The Y direction offset of the top center from the base center. (Optional . The diameter of the cone base (bottom) The vertical height of the cone The X direction offset of the top center from the base center. It has the same diameter as the bottom of the cone.

From 1 to 359 degrees. The stitches (tabs) hold the segments together. Separate Parts – Each segment is treated as an individual part. This measurement is the vertical distance from the center of the elbow exit radius to the elbow entrance. The width of the torch. Pre-Nest – The parts are nested together. Stitch Width Separate Parts Stitch Cut Stitch cut can only be answered "YES" if ‘separate parts’ is set to ‘Pre-Nested’. This is used to determine the proper part separation so the common line does not infringe on prenested parts. The desired width of the stitch. By forming every other gore Seam Type . The exit or smaller diameter of the elbow. This measurement is the horizontal distance from the center of the elbow entrance radius to the elbow exit.225 Reducing Elbow Max Segment Size Entrance Diameter Exit Diameter Elbow Entrance Radius Elbow Exit Radius Elbow Angle Number of Segments Kerf Width The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature The entrance or larger diameter of the reducing elbow. alternating from left to right. This number cannot exceed 12. SIDE will put all the weld seams on the side of the elbow. The number of sections (gores) used to make the elbow. connected by stitches (tabs). Be careful when going beyond 180 degrees.

It has the same diameter as the bottom of the cone. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part. . Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.4. (1. all seams will end up on the right or left. This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top.226 inside out. Heel/Throat locates the seam on the short side of the elbow.8) The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part. It has the same diameter as the top of the cone. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.2. This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the bottom. Pieces per Gore Left Hand Side Lap Right Hand Side Lap Top Side Lap Bottom Side Lap Weld Gap Top Collar Bottom Collar The number of individual pieces used to make a single section (gore).

This value cannot be greater than the outside values.227 ID_OD Ellipse Points per Quarter The points per quarter defines how many lines will make up a quarter of the ellipse. cannot be greater than the outside values. This value can be calculated when using the minor diameter and angle. The angle will be used to calculate the major diameters of the ellipse if none is provided. the smoother the arc. The smaller diameter of the inside ellipse. The higher the number of points. This value Outside Major Diameter Outside Minor Diameter Inside Major Diameter Inside Minor Diameter Angle The angle at which the ellipse will be tilted. The larger diameter of the inside ellipse. (optional) The major (larger) diameter of the outside ellipse. The minor (smaller) diameter of the outside ellipse. This value must be provided. .

Rectangle length in the X (horizontal) direction. This value must be provided. The higher the number of points. This value can be calculated if the minor diameter and angle are provided.228 Ellipse in Rectangle Points per Quarter The points per quarter defines how many lines will make up a quarter of the ellipse. The smaller diameter of the ellipse. A positive value shifts the ellipse to the left. Offset in inches of the center of the ellipse from the center of the rectangle. A positive value shifts the ellipse upward. The angle will be used to calculate the major diameter if none is provided. Rectangle Length Rectangle Width Major Diameter Minor Diameter X Offset Y Offset Angle . Rectangle width in the Y (vertical) direction. the smoother the opening. this will be the longer of the 2 cross sectional dimensions. Offset in inches of the center of the ellipse from the center of the rectangle. The larger diameter of the ellipse. NOTE: Since this part refers to the DIAMETERS. The angle the ellipse will be tilted.

Use the CUT option to cut the hole. Inside Diameter of the flange. The diameter of each of the bolt holes. Bolt Circle Diameter Bolt Hole Diameter Angle Adjustment Number of Holes Hole Type Pieces per Flange . calculated by subtracting the inside radius from the outside radius. An excellent idea for small diameter holes that need a special finish on them. If the width is used the OD will not be needed. just use Ang.If an impact (punch) marker. if the flange has 6 holes and is to be cut into 4 parts. The diameter of a circle running through the center of the bolt holes. The width of the flange. Use with "Angle Adjustment" to avoid cut sections from crossing bolt holes. This is an important option for fabrication of split flanges. For instance. Number of bolt holes or marks required Cut or Punch . = 12 degrees and the cuts will not interfere with the holes. zinc marker or laser etch function is available.229 Flange Outside Diameter Inside Diameter Width Outside Diameter of the flange. Adj. this will enable the machine to locate the holes without actually cutting. Number of pieces to make up a single flange. An adjustment in the angle at which the bolt holes will be located on the flange.

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part. The angle of the cut on the left of the pipe. Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds. The short side length of the pipe section. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part. The angle runs counter-clockwise from the bottom of the pipe. The angle of the cut on the right of the pipe. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part. .230 Angled Pipe Max Segment Size Pipe Diameter Pipe Length Left Angle Right Angle Left Hand Side Lap Right Hand Side Lap Top Side Lap Bottom Side Lap Weld Gap Number of Pieces The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature The diameter of the pipe section. The number of pieces that will make up the pipe. The angle runs counter-clockwise from the bottom of the pipe.

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part. . The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part. Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.231 Straight Pipe Max Segment Size Pipe Diameter Pipe Length Left Hand Side Lap Right Hand Side Lap Top Side Lap Bottom Side Lap Weld Gap Number of Pieces The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature The diameter of the pipe section. The length of the pipe section. The number of pieces that will make up the pipe. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part.

The radius of the elbow which will be used for the construction of the offset. You may change this number to suit your development. excluding the extensions. The length of the added material to the other end gore of the offset. (Pre-Nested) Pre-Nest – The parts are nested together. connected by Horizontal Offset Vertical Offset Extension A Extension B Number of Segments Pieces per Segments Kerf Width Stitch Width Separate Parts . This value is required only when the elbow is cut as Prenested. Remember. an accurate kerf value is necessary to ensure the correct gore dimensions. The overall length between the two pipe ends. This can be any odd number from 3 to 31. The number of pieces used to develop each segment. Since there is a common cut between gores. The length of the added material to one end gore of the offset. The vertical distance between the centers of the two parallel pipes being offset. The default is 5 segments. This value must be AT LEAST two times the radius of the elbow. The horizontal distance between the centers of the two parallel pipes being offset. The width of the stitch cut when cutting the off-set as a single piece. this is the full kerf diameter. This value must be no more than half the length of the offset.232 Offset Pipe Elbow Diameter Elbow Radius Length of Offset The diameter of the elbow.

Separate Parts – Each segment is treated as an individual part. SIDE will put all the weld seams on the side of the offset pipe. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part. By forming every other gore inside out. Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.233 stitches (tabs). all seams will end up on the right or left. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part. alternating from left to right. Heel/Throat locates the seam on the short side of the offset pipe. Left Hand Side Lap Right Hand Side Lap Top Side Lap Bottom Side Lap Weld Gap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part. . Stitch Cut Seam Type Stitch cut can only be answered "YES" if ‘separate parts’ is set to ‘Pre-Nested’.

with the diameter on top. to a parallel plane that passes horizontally through the center of the rectangular end (no matter what tilt).e. The offset of the center of the exit in relation to the center of the rectangle. if the diameter is horizontal then this is zero (0). This shape will always be maintained as a circle no matter what the tilt. The vertical height of the transition. The tilt of the exit from the horizontal plane. The rotation of the low point of the exit tilt. to the right. A zero value locates the low point at the 3 o'clock position. The right side MUST rotate down (clock-wise). a negative. A positive angle rotates this low point in a counter-clockwise direction. A positive value moves the center to the left.: 60° rotates the low point Exit Diameter Exit Center X Offset Exit Center Y Offset Exit Tilt Angle Exit Rotation Angle . To adjust the position of the angle use the next input field. The diameter of the exit.234 Rectangle to Round Max Segment Size Rectangle Length Rectangle Width Transition Height The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature The length of the rectangular base. This will establish the tilt "Angle". The width of the rectangular base. as viewed from the plan view. This height is derived from a plane that passes horizontally through the center of the circular end (no matter what the tilt). The offset of the circular center from the center of the rectangle in the positive (up) or negative (down) Y direction. When looking at the transition in elevation. (i.

. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange. It has the same diameter as the top of the cone. outside top dims’ is selected. the entire part will have to be described from the side. or 8 pieces. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange.235 to about the 1 o'clock position and 120° rotates the low point to the 11 o'clock etc. Joint Type Skirt Length 2 Skirt Length 3 Left Hand Side Lap Right Hand Side Lap Top Side Lap Weld Gap Top Collar Number of Pieces Inside Base / Outside Top Dimensions . if ‘Measure inside base. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange. the part will be measured as designated in the settings.) Rectangle Tilt Angle The tilt of the rectangular portion of the transition from the horizontal plane. Side Heel/Corner Specify where you would like the welds/seams: on the corners (in the middle of the bend) or on the flat sides. In order to tilt the bottom front and back. a tilt of 30° will drop the right side 30° from the center of the rectangle. 2. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part. The rectangle to round can be made from 1. A negative number will reverse this tilt. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part. If ‘NO’ is selected. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part. reorienting all other dimensions. If you choose 8 pieces. Skirt Length 1 A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 1. Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds. 4. Looking at the elevation.. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically. This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top. the part will be measured from inside the base of the part. and outside the top of the cone. A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 3. A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 2. there will be a bend at the corners and the sides. while the left will rise by the same degree. thus.

In all cases this radius MUST be greater than one-half of the diameter. Pre-Nest – The parts are nested together. This can save an extra weld seam at the end of the elbow. If you need more than 180. The stitch width is the width of the tab holding the gores together when prenested.236 Segmented Elbow Elbow Diameter Elbow Radius Extension A The diameter of the elbow The elbow center-line radius. The number of individual pieces used to make a single section (gore). This can save an extra weld seam at the end of the elbow. The B extension is the higher. This value is used only when the elbow is cut as a single piece. The number of sections (gores) used to make the elbow. The length of the extensions to be added to the end gores. The angle of the elbow. try the reducing elbow with the same size entrance and exit. an accurate kerf value is necessary to ensure the correct gore dimensions. The limit is 180 degrees. Since there is a common cut between gores. The length of the extensions to be added to the end gores. When getting down to very small angles (10° or less) be very careful to look at the flat layout to check for interference with quarter marks and if the part can really be cut. Separate Parts – Each segment is treated as an individual Extension B Elbow Angle Number of Gores Pieces per Gore Kerf Width Stitch Width Separate Parts . connected by stitches (tabs). The A extension is the lower.

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part. Stitch Cut Seam Type Stitch cut can only be answered "YES" if ‘separate parts’ is set to ‘Pre-Nested’. SIDE will put all the weld seams on the side of the elbow. To get all the seams on the heel (or throat) takes a little more creativity. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part. all seams will end up on the right or left.237 part. HEEL/THROAT will develop the seams alternating from the heel to the throat. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part. Left hand Side Lap Right Hand Side Lap Top Side Lap Bottom Side Lap Weld Gap The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part. alternating from left to right. . Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds. By forming every other gore inside out. Call us and we'll be happy to explain.

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part. The number of pieces that will make up the pipe. The amount of material on the pipe section extending below the tee opening. The amount of material on the pipe section extending beyond the tee opening. This is measured on the flat layout. This is measured on the flat layout. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part. Left Hand Side Lap Right Hand Side Lap Top Side Lap Bottom Side Lap Number of Pieces .238 Tee Into Partial Pipe Max Segment Size Pipe Diameter Material at Top Material at Bottom Material at Sides The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature The diameter of the main pipe section The amount of material on the pipe section extending above the tee opening. This is measured on the flat layout.

from the base line to the centerline of the leg. Zero (0) makes the opening parallel to the base.239 Y-Joint Any description of the Y-Joint would be incomplete without a brief look at the different names used to describe specific aspects of the fitting. The diameter to be established at the end (cuff) of the leg. Vertical Dimension 1 Horizontal Dimension 1 Angle from Base 1 Length of Leg 1 Angle of Left Pipe . The angle of the left leg opening (cuff) with respect to the plane of the base (horizontal). Max Segment Size Base Diameter Diameter 1 The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature The diameter at the base or waist of the Y-Joint. and on the inseam and outside for the two (2) piece leg. the seam(s) will be on the inside (inseam) for a single piece leg. this is a true circle and will retain its circular shape no matter what orientation it's in. Minus one (-1) makes the angle perpendicular to the center-line of the leg. The distance from the base line to the center of the leg opening. The "Base Diameter" is also referred to as the "waist". The horizontal distance from the base diameter center line to the center of the leg opening. Thus we have adopted the word "leg" to describe the right and left branches. Like the base diameter. Like a pair of pants. The linear distance measured from the center of the base opening to the center of the leg opening. The angle in degrees. In some cases this fitting is referred to as "pair of pants". and the seam joining the two halves of the fitting is often referred to as the crotch.

The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part. The linear distance measured from the center of the base opening to the center of the leg opening. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part. The horizontal distance from the base diameter center line to the center of the leg opening. The angle in degrees. The vertical distance from the base diameter center line to the center of the leg opening. Vertical Dimension 2 Horizontal Dimension 2 Angle from Base 2 Length of Leg 2 Angle of Right Pipe Left Hand Side Lap Right Hand Side Lap Top Side Lap Bottom Side Lap Weld Gap Leg 1 Collar Leg 2 Collar Bottom Collar Number of Pieces . Minus one (-1) makes the angle perpendicular to the center-line of the leg. this is a true circle and will retain its circular shape no matter what orientation it's in. The number of pieces required to make the Y-Joint. It has the same diameter as the bottom of the cone. Zero (0) makes the opening parallel to the base. This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of Leg 2. The angle of the right leg opening (cuff) with respect to the plane of the base (horizontal). The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the bottom of the part. Like the base diameter. up to 36. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part. Its diameter is the same as Diameter 2 of the Y Joint. This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of Leg 1. This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the bottom. Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds.240 Diameter 2 The diameter to be established at the end (cuff) of the leg. Its diameter is the same as Diameter 1 of the Y Joint. from the base line to the centerline of the leg.

The vertical height of the transition. The length of one of the parallel sides of the trapezoidal base. a negative. The tilt of the exit from the horizontal plane. to a parallel plane that passes horizontally through the center of the rectangular end (no matter what tilt). The offset of the circular center from the center of the rectangle in the positive (up) or negative (down) Y direction. A positive value moves the center to the left. with the diameter on top. When looking at the transition in elevation. to the right. The length of the other parallel side of the trapezoidal base. The right side Exit Diameter Exit Center X Offset Exit Center Y Offset Exit Tilt Angle . This height is derived from a plane that passes horizontally through the center of the circular end (no matter what the tilt).241 Trapezoid to Round Max Segment Size Trapezoid Width Length of Base 1 Length of Base 2 Left Trapezoid Angle Right Trapezoid Angle Transition Height The maximum length of any line segment used in a developed curvature The width of the trapezoidal base. The offset of the center of the exit in relation to the center of the rectangle. if the diameter is horizontal then this is zero (0). The diameter of the exit. This shape will always be maintained as a circle no matter what the tilt.

A negative number will reverse this tilt.. while the left will rise by the same degree. A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 2. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange. If ‘NO’ is selected. 2. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically. if ‘Measure inside base. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the right of the part. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically. Calculates amount of gap needed for full penetration welds. Looking at the elevation. A zero value locates the low point at the 3 o'clock position. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the left of the part. This is a separate piece of the cone that extends off of the top. the part will be measured as designated in the settings. as viewed from the plan view. 4. If you choose 8 pieces. the entire part will have to be described from the side. there will be a bend at the corners and the sides..) The tilt of the rectangular portion of the transition from the horizontal plane. To adjust the position of the angle use the next input field. The length of the extension at the remaining corner will be calculated automatically. In order to tilt the bottom front and back. This extension can be used as the continuation of the rectangular end or bent to form a connecting flange. outside top dims’ is selected. Side Heel/Corner Specify where you would like the welds/seams: on the corners (in the middle of the bend) or on the flat sides. thus. A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 3. Exit Rotation Angle The rotation of the low point of the exit tilt. It has the same diameter as the top of the cone.: 60° rotates the low point to about the 1 o'clock position and 120° rotates the low point to the 11 o'clock etc. This will establish the tilt "Angle". Skirt Length 1 A straight extension added to the rectangular base of the transition at point 1. The rectangle to round can be made from 1.242 MUST rotate down (clock-wise). (i. the part will be measured from inside the base of Rectangle Tilt Angle Joint Type Skirt Length 2 Skirt Length 3 Left Hand Side Lap Right Hand Side Lap Top Side Lap Weld Gap Top Collar Number of Pieces Inside Base / Outside Top Dimensions .e. reorienting all other dimensions. or 8 pieces. A positive angle rotates this low point in a counter-clockwise direction. a tilt of 30° will drop the right side 30° from the center of the rectangle. The length of the extensions or overlap to be added to the top of the part.

.243 the part. and outside the top of the cone.

This spreadsheet contains different values of the settings for different material grades and thicknesses. ProNest incorporates an advanced cost estimation algorithm. the material with the next smaller thickness will be used. material cost Weight. of cutting a particular part or nest. as described in the table below: Setting Material thickness Material density Material unit cost Labor cost per hour Labor cost per weight of parts cut Cost per hour Plate loading cost Feedrate Activation time Activation cost Process operating cost per minute Location Database Database Database Costing page Costing page Costing page Costing page Process parameters XLS Costing XLS Costing XLS Costing XLS Used to compute Weight.244 Chapter 12: Costing In order for the user to better estimate the costs. Default Costing Values Default values for the three main costing settings and the feedrate may be entered. then the default costing settings will be used. If no match is found. Additional information about how record matching is performed may be found in the section titled XLS Table Overview. When the costing XLS table is used. material cost Material cost Production cost Production cost Production cost Production cost Production time Production time Production cost Production cost Additionally. The costing settings for each process allow the user to specify the cost per activation. simple cost estimate all the way up to those that require extensive production costs based on itemized tables. This algorithm accommodates those who need just a quick. For those users that require more advanced costing capabilities. The process parameters and cutting techniques are discussed elsewhere in this document. the time required per activation. Costing Settings Values used in costing come from four main areas. ProNest utilizes an Excel spreadsheet containing the above mentioned time and cost factors. if an exact thickness match is not found. Default values for these settings may be used if material and thickness considerations are not important. and the cost of operating that process per minute. That is. These values will be used if no material entries in the tables are found that match the . the material thicknesses are used to delineate ranges. both in time and money. the cutting techniques tables allow you to further modify the cut quality of the nest by inserting corner slowdowns and radius slowdowns.

4 would go in cell F3. then analyze it to produce the production time. The $F$3 means that no matter where in the XLS you copy the formula. let’s say that the operating cost per minute is tied to a particular consumable cost. Any time the cost of the consumable changes.5” in row 7. In the Operating Cost Per Minute column. and all of the operating costs will automatically update to reflect the new cost. Further. let’s say that the consumption rate is known in hours. production cost. A summary of the calculations used appears below: • • • • • • Material weight = area of parts * material thickness * material density Material cost = Material weight * Material unit cost Process production time = Total cut length / feedrate + Number of activations * activation time Process production cost = Process production time * operate cost + number of activations * activation cost Total production time = The sum of process production time for each process Machine production cost = plate load cost + (labor cost per hour * production time) + (labor cost per weight * material weight) + (production time * machine cost per hour) Total production cost = Process production cost for all processes + machine production cost Total cost = Total production cost + material cost • • . rather than minutes. For example. and material cost. Let’s say that the consumable cost is in cell F3 of the XLS table. The user no longer needs to compute the operating cost/minute each time the consumable cost changes. Advanced Costing Advanced users may define formulae in the costing XLS tables to take some of the work out of costing. ProNest’s costing algorithms take the geometry of a part or nest. apply process parameters and cutting techniques to that geometry.245 material being used. then multiply the result by the value in cell F3. or if the user just wants to use default values and is not concerned with having different values for each material. F3 will always be referenced. Column G will be used for the consumption rate for each material. The user would enter 30 into the appropriate cell. one for the consumable cost and one for the consumption rate for each material. the user just needs to update the value in cell F3. If the consumable’s cost/unit is $4. The user could add 2 columns to the costing XLS table. the user could enter the following formula in cell 7: =(G7/60) * $F$3 This means “take the value in cell G7. divide it by 60. lets say the consumption rate is 30 units per hour. Obviously. How does costing work? Briefly. this example could be extended to include any number of consumables. For material A36 with a thickness of 0.

That would cause invalid results to be produced by the costing algorithm. The costing information displayed on the Add Parts screen is the cost and time to cut that part by itself. Material Thickness Activation Time Cost Per Activation Operating Cost Per Minute The name of the material The thickness of the material (matched as a range) Process activation time in seconds Cost of each activation The cost incurred for running that process for 60 seconds . The cost and time displayed on the Nest Properties screen represent the cost and time to cut that nest. It does not reflect the cost or time to cut this part once it has been nested. The costs and times displayed on the different reports depend on which report they appear on. and on some reports. Required column headers in the costing XLS table The following column headings are required and should not be modified in any way. the bottom portion of the Nest Properties screen. as is.246 Where is Costing Info Displayed in ProNest? Costing information appears on the Cost Info area of the Add Part List screen.

Additionally. they really are nothing more than a sequence of commands to be executed in a particular instance. descriptions of the different types appear below: Cutting Technique Type Base Condition Leadin Ramp Up Corner Ramp Down Corner Ramp Up Radius Ramp Down* Radius Ramp Up* Leadout Ramp Down Purpose Sets the overall conditions for the entire profile Changes conditions over the length of the leadin Changes conditions as a corner is approached Changes conditions coming out of a corner Changes conditions approached as a radial move is Brief Changes conditions coming out of a radial move Changes parameters prior to the beginning of the leadout .247 Chapter 13: Cutting Techniques General Description Cutting techniques allow the user to more precisely cut their parts. Available Types of Cutting Techniques ProNest allows several different types of cutting techniques to be used. by setting the cutting techniques to “(none)” in only certain processes. Don’t be intimated by cutting techniques. or a radius that causes problems being cut at speed with one process may cut just fine at full speed with a different process. different techniques may be used for oxyfuel than for plasma cutting. Because they are set up at a process level. These areas are generally areas that machines have difficulty cutting exactly as the user would desire. some processes will use cutting techniques and some won’t. it may be possible to use a single cutting techniques table for all cut processes. the user can control how the leadin and leadout of the part are cut to minimize damage to the torch and other parts and to increase cut quality. For all their simplicity. however. Or. Cutting techniques are set up at the process level. Part geometry such as sharp corners and small radii often do not cut well at the speed/parameter levels that are used in the rest of the profile. Why would you want to use cutting techniques? Cutting techniques allow the user to control virtually any process parameter at select points in the part geometry. That doesn’t mean the techniques have to be different. If the cutting techniques file is set up correctly. That means that different cutting techniques can be used for oxyfuel cutting and plasma cutting. Cutting techniques are purely optional. they can be very powerful and greatly improve cut quality. set the cutting techniques selection box to “(none)” in the settings for each process. A particular cut process may have different requirements when cutting around a corner. If you don’t want to use them.

There is an additional cutting technique that allows corners in the geometry to be rounded on output. Maximum corner angle that will be converted into a radius. Listed below are the headings that ProNest looks for. If either entity forming the corner is not long enough to accommodate the radius. If this value is not specified. Key Material Thickness Corner Ramp Down Corner Ramp Up Leadin Ramp Up Leadout Ramp Down Radiusn Ramp Down Radiusn Ramp Up Base Condition Corner Radius Purpose Material name or grade Material thickness Sequence of actions to take prior to a corner Sequence of actions to take after a corner Sequence of actions to perform on the leadin Sequence of actions to perform prior to the leadout Sequence of actions to perform prior to a radial move Sequence of actions to perform after a radial move Overall conditions present throughout the profile Radius to apply to corners when rounding. Key name Profile Type Purpose Denotes which type of profile to use this record for Valid values E = exterior I = interior O = open * = all profiles C = Crop V = Vaporize S = Skeleton (All) X = Skeleton (Exterior) N = Skeleton (Interior) Cutup Cutup . Corner Radius Threshold Angle Optional Keys Optional keys are provided so that the effects of the cutting techniques may be further refined to suit the exact circumstances required.248 * Note that multiple radius ramp up and ramp down sequences can be defined. a default of 90 degrees is used. the corner will not be rounded. Keys into the table Specific column names are looked for when applying cutting techniques to the part geometry.

It isn’t really a cutting “technique.0 Note that thickness and profile area may be entered in metric units. These commands generally modify the state of the machine and can affect things like the kerf compensation or the cutting speed. This parameter is a number or character string. Available commands Command Move Radius Purpose Perform a motion along an entity Maximum radius for which a particular radius ramp up or ramp down can be used Parameter Value Distance units in linear Length in linear units . Without the Base Condition. In this way. when no other cutting techniques are in effect.” Metric units will be used. and Profile Area. cutting techniques would have no way of knowing what the initial values for the various parameters are supposed to be. depending upon which command is being used. Thickness. please refer to the XLS Table Overview section. If an exact material name match is found. etc. yet all this is still through the use of just a few basic concepts. a cutting technique is a list of commands to be executed in certain situations. It is only a single condition. an asterisk (*) will match any key in the table. this is the state of the cutting parameters. it is the “default state” for the profile. all cutting techniques are composed of a series of commands separated by commas (. For example. Additionally. the next lower material thickness is used. In other words. If the optional keys of Profile Type and Profile Area are used. As with all the XLS tables.” Rather. The Base Condition The Base Condition is special. If cell A1 contains the word “inch. The Base Condition sets up the overall conditions for the entire profile. interior profile with an area less than 80. each command takes a parameter of some sort. Profile Type. the records being used can be further refined. For an example that illustrates the power and ease of use of the cutting techniques see the “Putting it all together” section later in this chapter. rather than a list of commands. but there is no matching thickness. even more situations can be covered. such as for exterior profiles with an area of less than 100. Record Matching Which cutting technique record will be used? The material name and thickness are used to figure out which cutting technique record to use. They can also be used to insert particular command sequences defined in the CFF. If it contains “mm. it would be possible to set up different cutting technique records for the same material. Other than the Base Condition.). For more information on record matching.249 Profile Area Maximum profile area to use this record for All values > 0. What is a Cutting Technique as used by ProNest? With the exception of the Base Condition.” these values will be assumed to be in English units. in this case Material.

These abbreviated commands may be used interchangeably with the longer forms of the commands and they have the same syntax. but this represents an absolute distance where the MOVE command is a relative distance. Comm and Move Radius Feedra te Feedra te% Kerf Kerf% Conditi on CffSec tion Dwell and Shorth Mv R Fr Fr% K K% Cond CS Dw . each cutting technique command also had a shorthand version.250 Feedrate Cutting speed to be inserted at a particular point Percentage of the last feedrate to be inserted at a particular point. based on the Condition or Kerf keyword Cutting condition to set Section of the CFF file to be output at this point Length of dwell command to be inserted at this point Similar to the MOVE command. Cutting linear minute speed in units per Feedrate% Percentage Kerf Kerf% Kerf compensation value in linear units Percentage Condition CFFSection Dwell Distance Character string Character string Time in seconds Distance units in linear Shorthand Commands Since individual cutting technique records can become very long. based on the Condition or Feedrate keyword Kerf compensation value to insert at a particular point Percentage of the last kerf compensation to be inserted at a particular point.

4” and so on. The Radius Keyword The “Radius” keyword is used to specify the largest radius for which a particular radius ramp up or ramp down will be used. This allows the user to set up different sequences of events for different radius sizes. things like voltage. Similarly. Cutting techniques use the “Condition” command to insert process parameters into the geometry of the part. there is no need to define radius ramp down sequences for 3”. no feedrates or kerfs will be output. nothing happens when the CFFSection command is encountered. Examples are included in a later section that will try to make these concepts clear. Alternatively. If no match for the individual conditions is found. or the most recent Feedrate command. (not including those generated by previous cutting techniques. the closest matching parameter record will be used for the base condition. or the most recent Kerf command.5”. whichever was encountered more recently. the user may insert a specific kerf compensation value into the CNC file. This section in the CFF can produce simple output like inserting a comment into the CNC file. the “Kerf%” keyword may be used to output a percentage of the most recently output kerf value.251 Distan ce Dist Interaction with Process Parameters By using the “Feedrate” keyword. but the CFF is incapable of outputting a feedrate or kerf value. such as slowdowns). Interaction with CFF Cutting techniques use the “CFFSection” command to cause a section in the CFF file to be output at a particular time. Simply setting up a radius ramp down sequence for 2. . but none of the other conditions will be used. Note that this percentage will be based off of the base value for kerf. the user may insert a specific feedrate value into the CNC file.99” and less than or equal to 10” will then use this sequence. This allows the user to not only change feedrate and kerf to the values associated with that condition without having to specify them individually in the cutting technique sequence. Also. Alternatively.99” and one for 10” will suffice. or more complex output like outputting a sequence of commands to set kerf and feedrate and turn off the auto height control. the most recent Condition encountered. 3. the user doesn’t need to specify a cutting technique sequence for each and every radius that may be used. if a feedrate or kerf value is specified in the cutting techniques. whichever was encountered more recently. if all radii between 3” and 10” will use a particular slowdown sequence. but it also allows the user to use any sort of parameters that are required for their particular situation. If no matching section name in the CFF file is found. but are by no means limited to. By using the “Kerf” keyword. Such parameters may include. current. the most recent Condition encountered. the “Feedrate%” keyword may be used to output a percentage of the most recently output main federate. For instance. and duty percent. All radii greater than 2. Note that this percentage will be based off of the base value for feedrate.

Also.25” along the leadin. the leadin ramp up will be scaled down. With the exception of leadin ramp up. Keep in mind that this discussion is applicable to any number of material records. and is not meant to represent actual cutting techniques to use in production. we will say that the Base Condition is “Base.252 What is a Corner For purposes of cutting techniques. such as where there isn’t enough room to apply a cutting technique as specified. How is the Move Command Used The “Move” command is used to advance along a particular entity.25”. we will only consider a single material. just in case. we want to set both feedrate and kerf to 100% of their base values. or one arc and one line such that they form a 90 degree or smaller angle. bear in mind that this discussion is meant as an example only. two arcs. In certain cases.5”. Putting It All Together Now that we’ve covered all the basics. The same is true if there is less space available between corners or radii than is needed. the default feedrate and kerf will be inserted instead. Cutting conditions are always scaled to fit in the space available. Below is how the leadin ramp up would need to look: . For purposes of this example. then change to 75% of the base feedrate and 105% of the base kerf. but only 0. no cutting techniques will be scaled to be larger than the desired length.” Leadin Ramp Up Leadin ramp up allows parameters to be varied over the length of the leadin. If leadin ramp up is supposed to cover 0.25” is available. Think of it as the conditions you would want to use if you weren’t using cutting techniques at all. After another move of 0. The total distance specified by all the Move commands in a cutting technique sequence is the total amount of space required to apply that sequence. If no base condition exists. move 0. albeit over a shorter distance. In the case of an arc. the total distance may be scaled so that all of the required actions will still be performed.25”. Safeguards Leadin ramp up always inserts the base condition at the end of the ramp up sequence. Call the material we will be using in this example “Test Material” and give it a thickness of 0. For the moment. Base Condition The Base Condition is simply the condition to use when no cutting techniques are in effect. The available space will be used to scale the cutting techniques so that both will fit. the tangent to the arc at the intersection point is used to determine the angle. Let’s assume for this example that we want to start out at 50% of the base feedrate and 110% of the base kerf. a corner is defined as being an intersection of two lines. let’s see how to set up a few different cutting techniques.

For this. For this example. In the Radius1 Ramp Down column. no matter what the size.25”. For radius ramp up.25). Radius Ramp Down Radius ramp down allows the user to specify parameter changes and special output conditions just prior to an arc motion. When a specific condition is encountered. CFFSection(LARGE RADIUS). move 0.25”. For radii less than or equal to 5”. Condition(BASE) Corner Ramp Down The following example makes use of conditions commands. In the Radius2 Ramp Down column.25). Move(0.25) For radii larger than 5” and up to 10”. the base values can be changed to reflect chain cutting requirements. we would enter the following: Radius(10). the technique will be applied to all radii.1”.25) Always keep in mind that you must use the “Radius” keyword to indicate the maximum radius to apply the cutting technique to when doing radius ramp up or radius ramp down. Kerf%(100) Note that the final Feedrate%(100) and Kerf%(100) are not necessary. Move(0. Corner ramp down allows cutting parameters to be changed when approaching a corner. up to 5” and between 5” and 10”. we want to drop the feedrate to 85%. move 0. Kerf%(110).25). The use of it in this example is meant to show the power and flexibility of ProNest. we would enter the following: Radius(5). Feedrate%(75). Feedrate%(75). as the base conditions are automatically inserted at the end of the leadin.253 Feedrate%(50). It is used to output specific commands required by certain controls in a variety of situations. Move(0. drop the feedrate to 90%. then move 0. let’s consider 2 ranges of radii. Kerf%(105).5”. drop the feedrate to 75%. Move(0. then move 0. Radius Ramp Up Radius ramp up is used to restore the cutting parameters to their base conditions after cutting an arc motion. CFFSection(SMALL RADIUS). output the contents of the CFF section “SMALL RADIUS”. . Otherwise. Move(0. Move(0.1). let’s output the contents of the CFFSection “LARGE RADIUS”. We’ll move 0. Move(0. Feedrate%(100). Feedrate%(85).5). we’ll need a column called Radius1 Ramp Up. let’s assume that we always want to come out of a radius the same way.25” then return to the BASE condition. Feedrate%(90). Note: The CFF section entry is not necessary in most applications. and addition to the process parameter table that allows many different values to be inserted to the code.

we’ll consider 3 different ranges: up to 10 square inches. and * for the last one.5). Add two copies of it to the cutting techniques XLS table.25). Move(0. profile type. Because we have used the conditions CRD1.25) Extended Example To continue with this example. Highlight the record we just added in the example. and CRD3 in this cutting technique. Let’s perform 3 0. In the Corner Ramp Up column we would type: CFFSection(CORNER). we can change BASE everywhere it . Let’s assume that we will need to return to the base condition after we output the CFF section CORNER and move 0. and beyond 100 square inches. If there isn’t a Profile Area column in the cutting techniques XLS. At this point. Move(0. For this example. the cutting techniques being applied are always the same. Condition(BASE) Leadout Ramp Down Leadout ramp down is used to alter process parameters just prior to leading out from the profile. Move(0. Dwell(2) Condition(CRD2). Without using the *. Corner Ramp Up Corner ramp up is used to restore cutting conditions to their base values when coming out of a corner. we would enter the following: Feedrate%(50). up to 100 square inches. We’ll slow down to 50% of cutting speed 0. no matter the profile size. In the Leadout Ramp Down column.25).25” motions. To make them do slightly different things. Move(0. we must make sure that there are records in the process parameters XLS table that use those conditions. Enter 100 for the next one.254 For this example of corner ramp down. Condition(CRD3). multiple materials. Move(0. the base condition is simply BASE. CRD2. enter 10. In the Corner Ramp Down column we would type: Condition(CRD1). and CRD3.5”. CRD2. There will be a dwell of 2 seconds at the corner.25” before the start of the leadout. we will exclusively use the Move and Condition commands and assume that our CFF is capable of outputting the correct parameters for us. Profile Area First.25). we’ll need to add one. As noted earlier. we’ll do a simple one. The * will match any area. we may encounter profiles that wouldn’t get cutting techniques applied to them. In the profile area column of the first record. For this example. let’s consider profile area. setting conditions CRD1. there are several other things we can consider: profile area.

This means that you should have an E.1) if the profile type for that record is an O. Of course. the corner ramp down will always produce the same results. and one as O. you would need to add the “Test Material” for thicknesses of 0. To do all of this. one as I.5”. I. all set up the same way. but they will produce different results on output. Add a Profile Type column if there isn’t one already. This time. That’s it. no matter what size profile we are outputting.25” and 0. For this example. Multiple Materials To set up a second material. change the kerf and feedrate values for the 12 records. and O for area 10. Remember to add the appropriate records to the process parameter table. So. there is no practical limit to the number of radius ramp down and radius ramp up cutting techniques that could be used. then import and nest parts for these materials. before this will actually work on output. copy the 9 cutting technique records that we’ve just set up and change the thickness to 0. Also copy the 12 process parameter records and change the material thickness there to 0.255 appears in the record for area of 100 to be BASE100. and an E. and O for area *. for each of the records with a profile type of I. remove any mention of Kerf or Kerf%.5”. It might also be a good idea to change CRD1. But after all this work. an E. Change all of the move commands to Move(0. To bring profile types into this example. Profile Type Now we have three cutting technique records. and CRD3 for each of the different profile areas. This means that the cutting techniques will apply a significantly larger kerf and feedrate value to the profiles. highlight the three cutting technique records and insert two copies into the cutting techniques table. we don’t want to change the kerf for interior profiles. we’ve got one material completely set up for just about any situation. I. change BASE to BASE999 and add an appropriate record to the process parameters table. Otherwise. we want all of the moves we make to be 0. For each of the different profile areas. . Now we have nine cutting technique records. we’ve also had to add or modify 12 records in the process parameters table. For open profiles. Troubleshooting Below is a list of common problems encountered while using cutting techniques and possible ways to resolve them. mark one of the Profile Types as E.1”. I. Double the feedrate and kerf for this process parameter record. CRD2. and O for area 100. We now have two materials set up for cutting techniques. for a total of nine records.5” to the material database. covering three different areas and three profile types for each of the areas. For profile area *. Of course. triple the feedrate and kerf from the original BASE record. Also in the process parameter table. We will need a record with that condition in the process parameters table.

I’m using profile area and large profiles don’t get any cutting techniques • Specify a cutting technique record with a very large area or ‘*’ for the area . or Kerf% commands with 0 or negative values as the parameter Make sure that the profile areas and types. Not getting any CFF section output. Cutting techniques are being applied. Only the base process parameters are being used • Make sure the process parameters XLS table contains records with the conditions being used in the cutting techniques XLS table 4. there won’t be any kerf values in the code Make sure that the cutting techniques being used cause the parameters to be modified Check for any Feedrate. Feedrate%. or Kerf% commands with 0 or negative values as the parameter • • 6. Cutting techniques are not being applied at all • • • Make sure the “Insert machine parameters into output” checkbox on the CNC settings screen is checked Check each of the processes being used to see that a cutting techniques XLS table and process parameters XLS table have been assigned. Check that the materials that you are using for your parts match one or more records in your XLS tables 2. even though the CFFSection command is used • Make sure the CFF section named in the cutting technique exists in the CFF file being used 5. Feedrate%. Kerf. If the CFF cannot output a kerf value once the torch is on. but no parameters are being output • • • Verify that each process used has a valid process parameter table assigned Make sure the process parameters XLS table contains records with the conditions being used in the cutting techniques XLS table Make sure the CFF is capable of outputting the parameters you are expecting. Kerf.256 1. Only some cutting techniques are being applied • • • • • • Check that the column headers in the cutting techniques table are correct Make sure that the materials you are using for all of your parts are represented in the cutting techniques XLS tables you are using Make sure all processes you are using have a cutting techniques table specified Make sure any radii specified in the cutting techniques are large enough to match any radial moves that require slowdowns in the parts Check for any Feedrate. if used. are correct 3.

. even though my cutting techniques and process parameter tables are set up correctly • Make sure the checkbox to “Use default process parameters only” is not checked for each of the processes. If the most recent condition was CRD1 and then a Feedrate%(50) was encountered. or I’m not getting it where it should be • Check the Radiusn Ramp Up and Radiusn Ramp Down columns to make sure that the Radius keyword is used to specify the maximum radius to use for the slowdown/speedup. • Set the correct condition before issuing a Feedrate% or Kerf% command. or the ‘*’ (for all profile types) must be used 8. Only default parameter values are being output. I can’t get a profile type of “EI”. The wrong feedrates and kerfs are being output.257 7. exterior. I’m getting radius ramp up/down where I don’t want it. Feedrate. 10. and open profile types must be specified in separate cutting technique records. interior. Omit the Radius keyword if you want the technique to apply to all radii. or Kerf command. 9. “EO”. the resulting feedrate would be 50% of the CRD1 feedrate. “IO”. These commands work on the most recently encountered Condition. or “EIO” to work correctly • Currently.

258

Chapter 14: Lead Style Settings
Using Lead Style Settings
ProNest allows the user to set up XLS tables containing leadin and leadout definitions for different materials. Each cutting process used may have a leads table assigned to it, though it is possible that the same table may be used for multiple processes. These tables are assigned in the settings for each process. Additionally, the user may set up different lead styles for interior and exterior profiles.

Default Lead Style Settings
Each process has default lead styles for both interior and exterior profiles. These settings are configurable by the user and would be used if no matching records are found in the XLS tables, or if the user desires that only default leads be used.

When Lead Style Settings Are Applied
Initially, lead style settings are not applied to CAD files until they have been added to the part list. This is done on the Add Parts screen. The part preview area of the Add Parts screen will not show the leads on the part until the part has been added. By default, the lead settings associated with the cut process and material of the part are used. If desired, the user may change the lead settings for a particular part after it has been added, or change the leads to be used for all parts subsequently added. More information about this may be found elsewhere in this document. Lead styles may also be applied if the user changes the material for the part once it has already been added to the part list. A dialog will be displayed allowing the user to change the lead styles or not.

Lead Style Settings XLS Tables
Each cut process can have two lead settings tables associated with it, one for interior leads and one for exterior leads. These tables contain the necessary information for leading into and out of the side of a profile and leading into and out of the corner of a profile.

Table Organization
The lead settings XLS tables are set up as follows: Cell A1 contains the units designation for the file, inch or mm. Cell B1 contains the row number of the English language column headers, n. Row n – English language column headers Anywhere between row 2 and row n may be any number of things, such as the column headers translated into a different language. These are purely informational and are ignored by ProNest.

259

Column Headers
ProNest looks for the following column headers when applying the lead settings: Column Header Material Purpose Material name or grade Contents Character string representing material name Thickness value linear units in

Thickness CornerInName

Material thickness Leadin style to use for corners

Character string representing leadin style: ARC, LINEAR, SPIRAL, TLOCK, LOCK7, LOCK9, STEP, DIAGONALSTEP, TLOCK or NONE Length value in linear units Angle degrees value in

CornerInScale CornerInAngle* CornerInExtension CornerOutName

Leadin size to use for corners Leadin angle to use for corners Extra length to add to beginning of corner leadins Leadout style to use for corners

Length value in linear units Character string representing leadout style: ARC, LINEAR, or NONE Length value in linear units Angle degrees value in

CornerOutScale CornerOutAngle* CornerOutExtension CornerOutOvertravel┼ SideInName

Leadout size to use for corners Leadout angle to use for corners Extra length to add to end of corner leadouts Over/undertravel distance to use for corners Leadin style to use for sides

Length value in linear units Length value in linear units Character string representing leadin style: ARC, LINEAR, SPIRAL, TLOCK, LOCK7, LOCK9, STEP, DIAGONALSTEP, TLOCK or NONE Length value in linear units Angle degrees value in

SideInScale SideInAngle* SideInExtension SideOutName

Leadin size to use for sides Leadin angle to use for sides Extra length to add to beginning of side leadins Leadout style to use for sides

Length value in linear units Character representing string leadout

260

style: ARC, LINEAR, or NONE SideOutScale SideOutAngle* SideOutExtension SideOutOvertravel┼ Leadout size to use for sides Leadout angle to use for sides Extra length to add to end of side leadouts Over/undertravel to use for sides distance Length value in linear units Angle degrees value in

Length value in linear units Length value in linear units

Notes:
* - When an ARC leadin or leadout is used, the angle represents the angle that the arc motion passes through. A quarter of a circle is a 90 degree arc. For LINEAR leads, the angle represents the angle the lead makes with the next or previous motion.

- A negative overtravel value will result in undertravel. This means that the profile will not be cut completely, but that a small portion of material will remain.

Units:
Cell A1 contains the units designation for the file. If this cell contains the word “inch,” English units (inches) will be used when the file is read. If it contains “mm,” then Metric units will be used. The units designation is used to control how ProNest interprets the Thickness, Scale, Extension, and Overtravel columns.

Column Header Row Number
Cell B1 contains the number of the row in the XLS table that contains the English language column names used by ProNest. If this value is blank, 0, or 1, row 2 will be assumed. ProNest uses the English language column headers to access the different lead style properties.

Material Must Match Material Table Information
All material names/grades that appear in the lead style XLS tables must be present in the ProNest material database in order for the lead styles to be used. The only time this is not true is if you are using the wildcard character to match the material name/grade. For more details on record matching, see below.

Record Matching
Exact matches
When lead style settings are applied, ProNest first checks to see if the lead style settings tables contain exact matches for material name/grade and thickness. This is one of the times that it is important to have the units in the XLS tables defined correctly. When searching for lead styles for a particular material, ProNest has to be able to tell what the material thickness in the XLS table really means. For instance, if the part that needs leads added is on A36 0.25”, but the material in the XLS file is A36 with a

261

thickness of 6.35, the XLS has to be in Metric units for a match to be found. (0.25” = 6.35mm)

Material Thickness Ranges
It is not always practical to expect there to be exact matches. Perhaps the material you are using has a slightly different thickness than the ones in your XLS tables, or maybe different thicknesses of material can all use the same lead settings. For this case, ProNest is capable of matching records based on thickness ranges. For example, if you have records in your lead settings XLS for 0.125”, 0.25”, and 1” and load a part on 0.5” material, you will still get leads applied, even though an exact match on material thickness was not made. What ProNest does is look for the largest thickness smaller than the thickness being searched for. In this case, ProNest could not find a match for 0.5” material, so it would use the lead settings for 0.25” material instead. Because of this material matching feature, you do not need to have records in your XLS tables for every material you have in your material database.

Using the wildcard character
There is still another way to match records. This is by using the wildcard character, rather than an actual material name or thickness value. The wildcard character is an asterisk (*). The wildcard character matches any valid material or thickness value. If, for example, the type of the material doesn’t matter, you can set up lead settings that will look only at material thickness when matching records. For instance, assume that you cut three different thicknesses, 0.125”, 0.25”, and 0.5”, of three different materials, normally a total of nine records in each lead settings XLS table. However, if each material uses the same lead settings for 0.125”, you would need only one record for material thickness 0.125”. You could replace the material name with the wildcard character (*). Now, you would need only seven records. Further extending this example, if all materials that are 0.25” thick use the same lead settings, you would need only one record for 0.25”, with ‘*’ as the material name. The same holds true for thickness values. Let’s say that you normally cut parts on two different materials, “Material1” and “Material2.” In this case, the lead settings will be the same for all the thicknesses of each material. You would need only two records in each of your leads XLS tables, one for Material1 and one for Material2. The thickness in each of these records would be *.

Units Conversion
ProNest will convert the following columns based on the contents of the units designation cell, cell A1: Thickness, CornerInScale, CornerInExtension, SideInScale, CornerOutScale, CornerOutExtension, CornerOutOvertravel, SideOutExtension, SideOutOvertravel. SideInExtension, SideOutScale,

When converting from inch to Metric, the values are multiplied by 25.4. When converting from Metric to inch, the values are divided by 25.4.

262

The Default Lead Style Settings Record
Each process has a default lead style settings record for interior and exterior profiles. These records are set up on the Interior Leads and Exterior Leads pages for each of the cut processes. These default records are used when a match cannot be found in the XLS table for that process, when no XLS table is associated with that process, or when the user has checked the “use default interior/exterior leads only” checkbox. An alternate way to set up default settings would be to have a record in each of the lead style settings XLS tables with material name of * and thickness of *.

Multiple Process Considerations
When importing multiple process parts, the leads on each profile may differ from the leads on the other profiles. This is because each process can use its own lead style settings table. Optionally, these tables may be ignored for each process and have default values used instead.

Moving leads
ProNest provides several different ways of moving the leads on a particular profile. The leads may be moved in the Add Parts screen’s preview window, they may be moved in Advanced Edit, or they may be moved on the nested parts themselves.

Editing leads in the Add Parts screen
Once you have added a part to the part list in the Add Parts screen, you can change the style of the leads, change their location, or both. Simply left click on one of the profiles in the preview window to see the leads style settings that are currently being used for that profile. Changing any of the values in the Lead Info area will change the leads on the selected profile. Click on the Move Leads Mode button and you will be able to move the leads simply by clicking somewhere on the profile. If moving from one corner of the profile to another or one side of the profile to another, the same lead styles will be used. However, if moving from side to corner or corner to side, the appropriate settings will be used.

Editing leads in Advanced Edit
In Advanced Edit you can also modify and move leads. Selecting the start point of the profile will display the properties for the current leadin and leadout that are on that profile. You may change the size, style, extension, etc. of the leadin and leadout. Click the “Apply” button to have these changes take effect. Clicking the “Reset” button, instead, will cancel any changes that you have made. While in entity or point mode, you can right click on a profile and select the Make Start Point option from the menu that appears. This will move the leadin and leadout to the point you right clicked on. You may then change the properties of the leadin and leadout. Another option is to go into “Quick Move Start Point” mode. While in this mode, moving the leads works like moving the leads in the Add Parts preview area in Move Leads Mode. When moving from side to side or from corner to corner the existing lead properties are used. When moving from corner to side or side to corner the appropriate lead style settings from the XLS table or the default lead style settings will be used.

263 Editing leads on nested parts Once a part has been placed on the nest and unselected. The default lead styles for each process are also saved in the job. but the original XLS tables will not be. However. which may not be what you want. The XLS tables. there may be times when the issue of using the default settings versus what is in the XLS tables becomes confusing. you will wind up with the defaults leads anyway. however. are not stored with the job. Therefore. The default lead style settings are stored with the job. Any lead styles used from the lead styles XLS tables. These only represent what was used for that profile. left clicking anywhere on a profile will move the leadin and leadout to that point. and also to change them. not to the master copy of the part in the Part List. Changes made in this mode will apply only to the particular instance of the nested part that is being changed. However. however. will come from the current XLS tables. the XLS table information is not. What is saved in the job? The lead style settings used for each profile are stored with that profile. the leadin and leadout settings for each profile are stored in that profile. If using material and thickness. Note that you may right click on the existing start point to modify the current lead styles without moving the leads. this means that the same lead styles will be applied to all of your parts. When moving from side to side or from corner to corner the existing lead properties are used. You may also right click on any point on the perimeter of a profile. . The default settings will be used regardless of the material and thickness. Unfortunately. The leads will be moved there and you will be given the opportunity to modify the lead settings that will be applied. The XLS tables are not stored in the job because of the potential size of these tables. you can have exactly the lead settings you want applied to each of the different materials you are using. such as when new parts are added to the job. If some of these records are missing. When moving from corner to side or side to corner the appropriate lead style settings from the XLS table or the default lead style settings will be used. when a job is read back in. Material/Thickness When using default lead style settings the material and thickness do not matter. This allows the user to go into the Add Parts window or Advanced Edit at any time and examine the leadin and leadout properties. Using default leads vs. While in Move Leads mode. One of the drawbacks of this approach is that you need to worry about having the correct records set up in both your material database and the lead settings XLS tables. using an XLS file ProNest has a lot of built in flexibility when it comes to applying lead settings. you may enter Move Leads mode. Settings saved with a job As mentioned before. the default lead settings used with that job will be restored.

This ensures. What if I change my material? • If you change the material for one of your parts. you will be given the option of keeping the existing leads or using the appropriate leads for the new material 3.264 What happens if you don’t match a record If no matching record is found in the XLS tables for the particular material and thickness that you’re using. that leads of some sort will always be applied to your parts. What if I always get default leads. What if I get the incorrect leads? • • • • • • • Check the lead settings for the process that you are using Check the CAD layering you are using. Check the spelling of the column headers in the lead settings XLS tables Make sure the column header row number (cell B2) contains the correct row number . as long as the defaults are set up. The CAD layers used determine the processes used Check to see that the “Use default interior/exterior leads only” checkbox is not checked if you want to use the XLS tables Check to see that the “Use default interior/exterior leads only” checkbox is checked if you do not want to use the XLS tables Check the spelling of the column headers in the lead settings XLS tables Make sure the column header row number (cell B2) contains the correct row number Check the spelling of the leadin and leadout names in the leads XLS tables 2. even if I don’t have the “Use default interior/exterior leads” checkbox checked? • • • • Check your process settings to make sure lead XLS tables are assigned Check the individual lead XLS tables to make sure there is a record that matches the material you are using. Troubleshooting: 1. the default lead style will be used.

arrows are drawn to the right of column captions. The editor type for a value is determined by column type (for date columns. A filtered list displays only the items that contain a specified value. The following filter criteria is supported: Value All Custom Blanks NonBlanks Value Description Displays all nodes. The Custom AutoFilter window allows you to determine two conditions for a column. Displays only the nodes that contain the selected value. Applies two criteria values within the current column using the comparison operators AND or OR. Filter arrows are displayed in blue in the columns that contain selected values. it is a pick editor. The grid pictured below is filtered to display records with a purchase date of 8/11/00 only: You can filter a value by more than one column simultaneously.265 Chapter 15: Database Filtering When using the filtering capabilities of the editor. Displays only the nodes that contain a non-blank value in a column. etc. for pick columns.): . Note: The Blanks and NonBlanks options are available only if the column you want to filter contains a blank cell. click the appropriate arrow and select the necessary value to filter the contents of your list. To initiate a filter. it is a date editor. Displays only the nodes that contain a blank value in a column.

it will not bump. To prevent choosing the wrong part. This is especially helpful if the desired part is nested inside of. click on the part with the left mouse button. select the center handle on the left side of the selected group. For example. the left edge if bumping left) is already in conflict. shift select will select the part. Parts that are completely off the plate will not bump.To rotate the selected group by a set increment. or the upper left handle. click on either the “+” Incremental Rotation Icon. Release the mouse button. shift select will unselect the part. The selection state of a part can be toggled by holding down the Shift key and clicking with the left mouse button inside the part region. A selected part can also be unselected by pressing the ESCAPE key. if a part is unselected. If the leading edge of a part (i.e.. If the “-“ Incremental Rotation Icon is used. the selected group rotates counter clockwise. press the corresponding keyboard arrow key pointing in the direction that you wish the part to be bumped. using either the bump handles or the arrow keys. Move With the part or group of parts in the selected state. Clicking outside the plate is preferred. Using the keypad. hold down the CTRL key when bumping. The selected group will move left until it is a part separation away from another part or the plate edge. The Incremental Rotate Angle setting in the Preferences screen is used. For example. If the “+” Incremental Rotation Icon or the upper left handle are used. .266 Chapter 16: Summary of Key Strokes Select/unselect a part To select a part. click as close as possible to the center of the desired part. the “-“ Incremental Rotation Icon. The selected group will rotate by the given increment. SHIFT plus an arrow key moves the part by the amount specified in Settings | Nesting – Nudge distance. select the center handle on the desired side of the selected group. If the part is selected. Rotate Rotating by Increment . as it eliminates the possibility of picking another part by mistake. click and hold the left mouse button on the part(s) dragging them to the desired position on the plate. A selected part can be unselected by choosing another part. To unselect a part. click anywhere outside of the part region. to bump left. the selected group rotates clockwise. To bump a part without using the mouse. Bump To bump a part. Geometric Bump To geometrically bump a part so that it ends up a kerf separation from another part or the plate edge. or in an interlocking manner with another part.

New York. and are available to conduct on-sight training. We accomplish this by maintaining a high standard of work life. and keeping our commitments.com http://www. MTC offers free training at our offices in Lockport. Don’t hesitate to contact us should you have any questions: MTC 22 West Main Street Lockport. world class software solutions. If you wish to contact us. our office hours are 8:00 AM – 5:00 PM EST Monday through Friday. Please call for pricing. adapting to industry trends. at MTC hope that this document has provided you with all information necessary to get you started using ProNest for Windows with a minimum amount of difficulty.267 Chapter 17: Technical Support We.com/ MTC is driven to achieve TOTAL CUSTOMER SATISFACTION with quality. listening to customer needs.mtc-software. NY 14094 Technical Support Main Office Fax E-mail Web Site 716-434-3755 716-434-3755 716-434-3711 techsupport@mtc-software. .

268 .